JP6204446B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a display device having a display unit capable of displaying an effect display, and a movable effect unit having a movable effect member.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In this pachinko machine, the fluctuation of the symbol (identification information) is normally stopped, but when the game ball wins a starting opening provided in the game area, the display device (for example, a liquid crystal display or the like) A variable display game that fluctuates a symbol for a predetermined time is performed, and a special game state (big hit) advantageous to the player is generated when the stop result of the variable display game becomes a special stop result mode (for example, “777”). There is something to do.

  Further, in the pachinko machine as described above, a center case is provided in the approximate center of the game area, and a plurality of movable effect members and drive sources for driving these movable effect members are provided in the center case, respectively. For the purpose of improving the interest of the game when performing a variable display game, a gaming machine that performs an operation effect of moving these movable effect members to the front side of the display device has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1). .

JP 2010-259553 A

  A gaming machine such as the above-mentioned Patent Document 1 has a problem of low space efficiency.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved space efficiency.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine comprising a display device having a display unit capable of displaying an effect display, and a movable effect unit having a movable effect member,
The movable effect unit includes at least a first movable effect unit including a first movable effect member and a second movable effect unit including a second movable effect member,
The first movable effect member includes a first position forward of the display unit via a first drive mechanism by a first drive source, and a second position on the edge side of the display unit with respect to the first position. Can be moved between,
The second movable effect member includes a third position in front of the display unit via a second drive mechanism by a second drive source, and a fourth position on the edge side of the display unit with respect to the third position. Can be moved between,
The predetermined part of the first movable effect member is visible to the player at the first position, and the predetermined part of the first movable effect member and the part of the second drive mechanism are: When the first movable effect member is located at the first position, it does not overlap in the front-rear direction, and when the first movable effect member is located at the second position, it is arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. And
The first movable effect member and the second movable effect member are arranged substantially side by side on a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction ,
The first position and the third position are at least partially overlapped .

  According to the present invention, space efficiency can be improved.

It is a perspective view which shows one Embodiment of the game machine which concerns on this invention. It is a front view which shows the structural example of the game board in the game machine of embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system and game control apparatus which are provided in the back surface of the game machine of embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control apparatus in the control system of FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation state of a normal fluctuation winning apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind and selection ratio of a special result. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of an effect state. It is a disassembled perspective view of the center case of embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the front structural member of embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the back surface component of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the back surface component of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the back surface component member of embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the upper decoration production | presentation apparatus and downward movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 1st movable production device of the embodiment of the present invention, the 2nd movable production device, and the 3rd movable production device. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (before operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (before operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (before operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (before operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (after operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (after operation | movement) of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 2nd movable presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (during operation | movement) of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (after operation | movement) of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement aspect (after operation | movement) of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the position after the operation | movement of a 1st movable effect member, and the position after the operation | movement of a 2nd movable effect member and a 3rd movable effect member. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration space of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration space of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration space of embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration space of embodiment of this invention. It is the elements on larger scale of the 2nd drive gear part of the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a main process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a main process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure game processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a stop symbol information setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a stay mode information setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special figure fluctuation process. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution aspect of a special figure fluctuation display game. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special figure display process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special figure display process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating jackpot end setting processing 1. FIG. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the jackpot end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart for demonstrating jackpot end setting processing 3. FIG. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the jackpot end setting process 4. FIG. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a small hit | ending process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating special figure normal process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the transmission command at the time of a power failure recovery. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 1st main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 2nd main processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a normal game process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating 1st scene control processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in fluctuation | variation. It is a flow chart for explaining change frequency management processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a fluctuation pattern information setting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating an ending process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the ending process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the ending process at the time of the small hit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution aspect of the special figure fluctuation display game in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind and selection ratio of the special result in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the production state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the common production in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation state of the normal variation winning apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind and selection ratio of the special result in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the production state in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution aspect of the special figure fluctuation display game in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the kind of special result and selection ratio in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the special effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the ending process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the ending process at the time of the small hit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the state of the starting memory | storage in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern information setting process in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen when the jackpot log | history information in 6th Embodiment is displayed on the display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the log | history screen display table in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st information storage area of the presentation control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display timing of the jackpot history information in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen when the jackpot log | history information in 6th Embodiment is displayed on the display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen when the jackpot log | history information in 6th Embodiment is displayed on the display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen when the jackpot log | history information in 6th Embodiment is displayed on the display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display timing of the jackpot history information in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display timing of the jackpot history information in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st main process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the power-on process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the customer waiting process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the customer waiting screen setting process in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart for demonstrating the normal customer waiting process in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart for demonstrating the customer waiting movie process in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the first history screen processing in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the second history screen processing in the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a flowchart for explaining the first history screen processing in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 3rd log | history screen process in 6 embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in change in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining change frequency management processing in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the fanfare process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the PB input process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the PB invalid setting process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining SB input processing in a 6th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the selection ratio of the history screen display table in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the PB input process in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the display screen setting process in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the lottery table in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the other example of the display screen setting process in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during a change in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the mode lottery process in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the mode lottery table in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the PB input process in the 1st modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the probability alerting | reporting setting process in the 1st modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the other example of the probability alerting | reporting setting process in the 1st modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the ending process in the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining change frequency management processing in the 2nd modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the display screen setting process in the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the mode lottery process in the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the probability alerting | reporting setting process in the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the information lottery table in the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the other structural example of a game board. It is a figure which shows another example of a display screen when jackpot history information is displayed on a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the identification information in 8th Embodiment, and a stop result suggestion display mode. It is a figure explaining the display pattern of the stop result suggestion display mode in an 8th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the stop pattern in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the background display in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the power-on process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process in change in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the mode lottery process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining change frequency management processing in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern information setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the division | segmentation effect information setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the background switching process in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the 1st modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the other example of the display mode in the 1st modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the stop pattern in the 2nd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the 2nd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the display mode and movable effect member in the 3rd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the display mode and movable effect member in the 3rd modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the ending process in the 4th modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the ending process at the time of the small hit in the 4th modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the division | segmentation effect mode setting process in the 4th modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the 5th modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the prefetch command reception process in the 5th modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern information setting process in the 5th modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern table in the 5th modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the other example of the display aspect of the prefetch notification in the 5th modification of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the other example of the display aspect of the prefetch notification in the 5th modification of 8th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  A gaming machine 10 according to an embodiment of the present invention includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15. On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  In addition, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a ball payout device provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out. A lower tray 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the tray ball outlet 22 and the upper tray 21 are full, and an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device are provided. Further, an effect button 25 and a select button 29 having an operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player are provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player turns the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to be placed in the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire towards. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened is performed in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can do. Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and is formed to protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). A plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, a background image that enhances the effect, and the like are displayed in an area (display area) in which an image of the display screen can be displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. In addition, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40.
.. Are provided with general winning opening switches 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered each general winning opening 35.

  Also, below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening 36 as a first starting winning opening (start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a reverse “c” is placed directly below the start winning opening 36. A normal variation winning device (general power) 37 having a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that are opened in a letter shape and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in and has a second start winning opening (start winning area) inside. It is arranged.

The pair of opening / closing members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state.
Then, when the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and a normal variation prize is won. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows.

  Further, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted or a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is disposed below the usual figure starting gate 34. Yes.

The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player).
That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning port solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. By converting the closed state from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player.
In addition, a count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area).
Below the special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 39 for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (for example, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 that form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for executing a common figure variable display game triggered by winning a prize at one place.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (first special figure display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. A second special figure fluctuation display unit (second special figure display) 52 for a figure fluctuation display game. Although not shown in the collective display device 50, the starting memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game composed of a variable display section (common figure display) for the normal figure variable display game and four LED lamps. Special figure 1 hold indicator for notification and special figure 2 hold indicator for special figure 2 variable display game notification, for start memory number notification of general figure variable display game composed of two LED lamps The first game status indicator that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of a big hit, the second gaming state indicator that lights up when a short time state occurs and notifies the occurrence of a short time state, and the gaming machine 10 A high-probability alarm that displays that the probability status of the jackpot is a high-probability state when the power is turned on, and a number-of-rounds indicator that displays the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning device 38) Yes.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the first special figure display 51 and the second special figure display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the display device 41 is performing the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. The center segment blinks to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game. When the result of the game is “big hit”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result mode other than the result mode (for example, a number such as “3” or “7”) in a lit state.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the hitting ball launcher toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the out port 39 provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatus 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is awarded by the payout control apparatus 200. It is discharged from the controlled dispensing unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played.
In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, When 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, if it is less than the upper limit of the normal figure start memory number, the general figure start memory number is added (+1) and the general figure start memory number is increased. One figure start memory is stored. The memorized number of the normal start prize is displayed on a general figure hold display (not shown) for notifying the start prize number of the collective display device 50.
In addition, in the normal chart start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining a hit error of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value In addition, a specific result mode (specific result) is derived by hitting the common map fluctuation display game.

The usual map change display game is executed by a change display unit (usual display device) (not shown) provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general and normal symbols) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information is displayed by blinking this LED. The fluctuation display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result.
Note that, for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like may be used as the normal identification information, which is displayed by variably displaying for a predetermined time and then stopped. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a specific result, the pair of movable members 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). It becomes a state. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  When the random number value extracted at the time of detection of the passage to the universal figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure indicator stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, the normal variation winning device 37 is in a state in which the movable member 37b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the built-in general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3). It is converted and the winning of the game ball is allowed.

The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the first special figure variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and is awarded to the normal variable winning device 37. The played game balls are detected as start winning balls for the second special figure variation display game, and stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as a limit.
In addition, when the starting winning ball is detected, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted, and the extracted random number value is stored in a special figure memory in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Each area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 on-hold display (not shown) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and the display device 41 of the center case 40. Is also displayed.

The game control device 100 uses the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 to display the first or second special figure on the basis of the winning entry to the starting prize opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the starting memory thereof. Play a variable display game.
The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41 is executed. ing.
As a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode, a special game state (so-called big hit state) ) Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). The variation display is started in the order of symbols), the symbols that have been varied after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a special decoration pattern corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.
Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes possible, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is supposed to be executed.

In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one.
On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. When the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable prize winning device 37) in a state that is not in a special state or in a special game state, the start memory number is 1 if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number. By adding, one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory.
In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switches 35a to 35n, the count The switch 38a is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been. A micro switch having a mechanical contact is used for the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like. be able to.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU section 110 receives signals (starting winning detection signals) from a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a proximity switch interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 in the input section 120. An inversion circuit 112 composed of an inverter or the like that is logically inverted and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator are provided to generate a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, You may comprise so that it may provide on a main board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 constitutes a control means for comprehensively controlling the game. Specifically, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state.
The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is out of order, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is per 15R probability variation or 2R probability variation, and the like.

  Reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can change, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state advantageous to the player (special game state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state. This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (having different reliability), such as normal reach, special 1 reach, special 2 reach, special 3 reach, etc. Is set.

  The reliability increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date), it may be included in the variable display mode. Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed.
Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot determination random number for the special figure variation display game (random number for jackpot determination), a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a fluctuation in the special figure variation display game. Generates variation pattern random numbers (variation mode determination random numbers) for determining patterns (including the execution time of variation display games in various reach and non-reach variation display), random numbers for determining hits of ordinary variable display games, etc. And a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and the update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 It has a clock generator.

  In addition, the CPU 111A selects one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A9) in a special figure game process to be described later. One fluctuation pattern table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Any one of a plurality of variation pattern tables is selected based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, a predetermined timing immediately after recovery from a power failure, etc. The fluctuation pattern table is selected and acquired.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, and a general winning port. An interface which is connected to the switches 35a to 35n and the count switch 38a and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. A chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Proximity I / F 121 seems to be floating because the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the proximity switch is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. An abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  All the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are supplied to the second input port 122 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140, and also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. It is like that. In addition, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 122. It is configured. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 detects that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input, and detects negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a start winning opening 36 converted by signals from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the proximity I / F 121. The start port 1 switch 36a in the inside, the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the general winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the signals from the count switch 38a are taken in via the data bus 140. A second input port 122 for supplying to the microcomputer 111 is provided. The data held in the second input port 122 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 122. be able to. The same applies to other ports described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 receives signals and payouts from the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 123 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 124 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 124 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 123 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 124 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs a 4-bit data signal output to the payout control device 200, a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data, and a data strobe signal SSTB output to the effect control device 300. 1 and a second output port 132 for generating an 8-bit data signal to be output to the effect control device 300. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by parallel communication. In addition, the data strobe signal from the first output port 131 is input to the output unit 130 in order to prevent a signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300, that is, to ensure one-way communication. A unidirectional buffer 133 that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the SSTB and the second output port 132 is provided. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 134 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 134 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 134.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 134 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 134 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variation winning device 38 (a large winning opening solenoid) 38b and a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c to open a movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. The third output port 135 for outputting the opening / closing data of the LED and the ON / OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected. A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line connected to the anode terminal, and a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 are provided. It has been. Information relating to the gaming machine 10 output from the external information terminal 71 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal installed in a game store or a game hall internal management device (not shown).

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the big prize opening solenoid 38b output from the third output port 135, and receives the solenoid driving signal and the opening / closing data signal of the power solenoid 37c to generate the solenoid driving signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a for outputting, a second driver 138b for outputting an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136 The external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the external information A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the terminal 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the third driver 138c that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the second driver 138b for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs 12 V, and drawing the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 134, the third output port 135, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bi-directional communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 122 and 123 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC), as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311. , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312 and various melody and sound effects are reproduced from the speakers 19a and 19b. The sound source LSI 314 for controlling the sound output is provided.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and an audio ROM 324 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, a serial system is used between the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 313a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 313b, a signal conversion circuit 313c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. It is possible to display on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost compared to the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are used. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Fluctuation start command, start opening winning effect command, starting opening winning effect design command, customer waiting demonstration command, fanfare command, probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F 331 A change stop command, a big hit end command, a power-on command, etc. are received as an effect control command signal. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 drives and controls a board decoration device (for example, a lamp provided in the center case 40) 42 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Board decoration LED control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the front frame 12, game board 30 (center) A board effect device provided in the case 40 (for example, a first movable effect device 730, a second movable effect device 760, and a third movable effect device 770 that enhance effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). Etc.) board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the motor 44, a motor provided on the front frame 12 (for example, the moving roller) Frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling the motor) 45 for operating the door 16 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps, motors and solenoids are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes the switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12, the switch 29a built in the select button 29, and the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the on / off state of the effect motor switch to be detected and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311; an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12; And an amplifier circuit 337b for driving the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. DC32V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and speaker, and a reference for these DC voltages It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V used to turn on the monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, the DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are in a reset state. In this embodiment, a general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining whether or not the normal variation display game is missed is performed. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display device, a process for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general map display, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable members 37b and 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time. The opening control is performed as described above (for example, for 0.3 seconds). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is missed is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state (production mode) is set, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. . That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a display control unit that performs display control of the variable display game.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A performs control for allowing the game ball to flow into the special winning opening by, for example, opening the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b. . Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 25 seconds or 0.5 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) is performed in which this is repeated (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times or 2 times). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short time state as a game state after the special game state is ended based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 ms is 600 ms). Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal fluctuation display game being won, the first opening time (for example, 300 ms) in which the opening time (normal power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1400 ms). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of the general electric power) is not equal to the first number of times of opening for one time with respect to the result of one hit of the normal figure changing display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as the operation state of the normal variation prize winning device 37, the normal operation state that is not the short-time state (no short time) and the first operation state that is the short-time state (high support), One of the second operation states (medium support), which is a short time state, is set. In the normal operation state, the usual figure fluctuation time is the first fluctuation display time, and the usual figure stop time is the first stop time. Moreover, the open time of the public power is the first open time, and the number of open times of the normal power is the first open count. Furthermore, the normal probability is low.

  The first operation state has a higher probability of normal figure than the normal operation state, the second fluctuation time with a short normal figure change time, the second stop time with a short normal figure stop time at the time of hitting, and open of the electric power The second opening time with a long time and the second opening number with a large number of times of normal power opening. In addition, the second operation state is the same as the normal operation state in terms of the normal map change time, but is different in that the normal map probability is high and the probability is high. Therefore, the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is the shortest in the normal operation state, and becomes longer in the order of the second operation state and the first operation state. That is, it becomes an advantageous state for the player in this order. In the following description and drawings, the short-time state may be referred to as general power support or support. In addition, the first operation state may be referred to as high support, and the second operation state may be referred to as medium support.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the special results are set with a plurality of types in which the execution state of the special game state and the additional game value given to the player after the end of the special game state are different. Select special results based on design random numbers. That is, it can be said that the execution mode of the special gaming state and the amount of additional game value are determined based on the jackpot symbol random number. In addition, the execution mode of the special game state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is the number of rounds that can be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening. Further, the additional game value means that the game state is set to a high probability state until the next special result mode is derived after the special game state ends, or the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state ends. It is to be in a short time state.

  There are five special results: 15R probability change (symbol), 15R normal (symbol), 2R accuracy (symbol), 2R support (symbol), and 2R latency (symbol). 15R probability variation (symbol) and 15R normal (symbol) are both 15 rounds in the special game state, and the special variable prize winning device 38 in each round is the first openable time (25 seconds). is there. The 15R probability variation (symbol) becomes a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state and becomes the first operation state (high support) until the next big hit. In addition, 15R normal (symbol) becomes the first motion state (high support) until the probability state becomes the normal probability state (low probability) after the special game state ends, and 70 special figure variation display games are executed. .

  The 2R accuracy (symbol), 2R support (symbol) and 2R latency (symbol) are both 2 rounds in the special game state, and the special variable prize winning device 38 can be opened for the second time in each round. It is possible time (0.5 seconds). In any case, the probability state becomes a high probability state after the special gaming state ends. The 2R accuracy (symbol) is in the first operation state (high support) until the next big hit after the end of the special gaming state. Further, 2R medium support (symbol) will be in the second operation state (medium support) until the next big hit after the end of the special game state. Moreover, 2R latency (symbol) becomes a normal operation state after the end of the special game state, and does not become a short-time state.

  The selection ratio of these special results is different between the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the first special figure variation display game, 15R probability variation (symbol) and 15R normal (symbol) are each selected with a probability of 30%. The remaining 40% will be 2R big hit, but as shown in Fig. 6 (c), the selection ratio of 2R accuracy, 2R support and 2R latency is the gaming state when the special result occurs (probability state and operation state) It depends on. For example, if the gaming state when a special result occurs is a normal probability state (low probability) and a normal operation state (no support), the probability that 2R accuracy and support during 2R will be selected is 0%, and 2R latency The probability of being selected is 40%. Since the gaming state is set based on the type of special result, the selection ratio of the type of special result to be generated next depends on the probability state set by the type of the most recent special result or the operating state of the normal variation winning device 37. It can be said that it is set.

  Further, the first special figure variation display game is configured to generate a small hit with a predetermined probability. When a small hit occurs, a specific result is displayed and a specific gaming state is entered. In the specific game state, the number of rounds is two rounds as in the case of 2R jackpot, and the opening time of the big prize opening is the second opening time (0.5 seconds). Note that the probability state after the end of the specific gaming state and the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 are the same as the state before the small hit occurrence. That is, 15R probability change and 15R normal have a first special result that causes the first special gaming state to occur, and 2R odds, 2R support, and 2R latency have a gaming value that is given to the player more than the first special gaming state. A second special result is generated that generates a second special gaming state that is low and provides a gaming value equivalent to the specific gaming state. It should be noted that the execution mode and special results of the decoration special figure change display game that will be supported during 2R latency and 2R, and the subsequent special game state, the execution mode and specific results of the special figure change display game that will be a small hit, and the subsequent specification Since the same effect is performed in the gaming state, it is difficult for the player to determine which hit. However, the special result and the specific result on the special figure 1 display 51 are different symbols.

  Here, the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set. That the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery, for example. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

  FIG. 7 shows the types of effect states and the transition conditions. The types of performance states include a normal mode, a latent mode, a probability change mode, and a time reduction mode. Each effect state differs in the type of background to be displayed, the type of character, the execution mode of the variable display game, and the like, and each effect state is different to the extent that the player can recognize which effect state. Although the latent mode is internally divided into a latent mode A and a latent mode B, the same production is performed, and it is difficult to determine which of the latent modes A and B is based only on the production. is there.

  The normal mode is a state in which the normal probability state (low probability) and the normal operation state (no support) are clearly notified. In this normal mode, the first special figure variation display game is mainly executed since it is in the normal operation state. Therefore, the special result in the first special figure variation display game in the normal probability state and the normal operation state is shown in the figure. The selection ratio was shown.

  The 2R big hit that can be selected in this normal mode is only the 2R latent, and when this becomes the 2R latent, the mode shifts to the latent mode (latent mode A). In this case, the probability state becomes a high probability state. Also, when a small hit occurs in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the latent mode (latent mode A). In this case, the probability state becomes a normal probability state. As described above, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the game is a 2R latency or a small hit based on the decoration special figure change display game, the special game state, or the specific game state. In addition, when 2R latencies or small hits occur in the normal mode, the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 remains in the normal operation state, and it is difficult to determine from this point. Therefore, by shifting to the same latent mode when 2R latent and small hits are made, it becomes difficult to determine the probability state, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  Of the latent modes, the latent mode A is a state in which a high probability state or a normal probability state and a normal operation state are established. Since the first special figure variation display game is mainly executed in the latent mode A, the first special figure variation display game in the case of the high probability state or the normal probability state and the normal operation state is shown in the figure. The selection ratio of special results in the display game is shown.

  In addition, the latent mode B among the latent modes is a state in which a high probability state and a second operation state are established. In this latent mode B, it is the second operation state, but the second operation state is different from the normal operation state only in the normal figure probability, and the first special figure variation display game is mainly executed. Indicates a selection ratio of special results in the first special figure variation display game in the high probability state and the second motion state. In the latent mode B, an effect similar to that of the latent mode A is performed, and the second operation state is similar to the normal operation state because only the normal probability is different. However, since the selection ratio of the special result in the case of 2R big hit is different, a novel game in which the type of special result selected in the case of 2R big hit is greatly different can be executed even in the same latent mode. Can enhance the interest of the person.

  In the latent mode, it becomes a non-notification state in which the probability state is not clearly notified. As a result, the expectation for being in a high probability state and the expectation for being a special result are enhanced, and the interest of the game is enhanced. However, the latent mode B (high probability state) can be recognized by carefully observing the operation of the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, when the game shifts to the latent mode due to the occurrence of a small hit in the normal probability state, the game returns to the normal mode when the special-figure display game (the outlier result) is executed a specified number of times (here, 10 times) after the shift. It is like that. For this reason, the latent mode continues in the special-figure display game for the specified number of times (here, the tenth time) after shifting to the latent mode (including the case where the latent mode is entered again) after 2R big hit or small hit. Production of whether or not to do is performed. In other words, this effect is an effect that suggests a probability state, and the game can be played with peace of mind without the probability state being unknown and without continuing the game. However, even if it is a normal probability state, if it is a small hit in the special figure variation display game of the specified number of times, it will be in the latent mode again in the normal probability state, so the probability state is not necessarily clearly notified. .

  When the 15R or 2R probability change occurs in each mode, the mode changes to the probability change mode. The probability variation mode is a state in which it is clearly notified that the state is a high probability state (high probability) and the first operation state (high support). Since the second special figure variation display game is mainly executed in this probability variation mode since it is the first operation state, the selection ratio of the special result in the second special figure variation display game is shown in the figure. Since the 2R big hit does not occur in the second special figure fluctuation display game, it is possible to surely get a ball.

  When it becomes 15R normal in each mode, it shifts to the time reduction mode. The time reduction mode is a state in which it is clearly notified that the normal probability state (low probability) and the first operation state (high support) are present. Since the second special figure variation display game is mainly executed in this short time mode since it is the first operation state, the selection ratio of the special result in the second special figure variation display game is shown in the figure. At this time, when the special figure variation display game is executed 70 times in the short mode, the normal operation state is entered and the normal mode is entered.

  By making such a selection ratio of special result types and transition of the production state, a novel game can be executed and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, after the special gaming state ends, the same specific performance state (latent mode) is set when the high probability state and the second operation state are entered and when the high probability state and the normal operation state are established. Different gaming states can appear as the same gaming state. Even in the same specific performance state, the amount of game balls consumed is different between the second operation state and the normal operation state. Can be improved. In addition, although it is a high probability state, in a state where the amount of game balls consumed is larger than in the case of the first operation state, it is possible to produce an effect that is not performed in other states, so a novel game is It becomes feasible and can prevent the desire to continue playing from being lost.

  Also, even in the same latent mode, there are special results depending on whether the state is the high probability state and the second operation state (latency mode B) or the high probability state or the normal probability state and the normal operation state (latency mode A). Since the selection ratio (selection ratio of the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 after the end of the special gaming state) is different, the tendency of the type of special result to be selected next in the latent mode (of the normal variation winning device 37) The tendency of the operation state) can be made different, so that a novel game can be executed and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, the selection ratio of the special result (15R probability variation and 2R accuracy) that becomes the high probability state and the first operation state is higher in the probability state and the normal operation state than in the normal probability state and the normal operation state (normal mode). In some cases (latent mode A) is higher, and in the case of a high probability state and the second operating state (latent mode B), it is higher. In other words, since the rate of transition to the most advantageous state for the player is higher in the latent mode than in the normal mode, the impression that it is easier to shift to the probability change mode through the latent mode. It is possible to prevent the willingness to continue the game from being lost even in the latent mode in which the amount of game balls consumed is greater than in the first operation state. In addition, even in the same latent mode, the rate of transition to the most advantageous state for the player is higher in the second operational state advantageous to the player than in the normal operational state. The difference based on the difference in operation state can be increased, and a novel game can be executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the selection ratio of the special result (2R latency, that is, the special result that shifts to the latent mode A) that becomes the high probability state and the normal operation state is the high probability state and the first operation state (probability change mode) or the second operation state ( The case of the high probability state and the normal operation state (latency mode A) is higher than the case of the latent mode B). Therefore, even in a high probability state, in the normal operation state where the amount of game balls consumed is large, there is a high possibility that the normal operation state will be resumed even if a special result is derived. If the first or second operation state is smaller than the operation state, there is a high possibility that the first or second operation state is reached again. That is, even in the same high probability state, there is a high possibility that the disadvantageous state continues for the player, but the advantageous state is also likely to continue, and the difference between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state is large and innovative. The game can be executed and the interest of the player can be enhanced. And even if it is a normal operation state with much consumption of game balls, if it is a high probability state, it will continue a game, Therefore The balance of the profit of a game store and a player can be maintained.

  In the case of the high probability state and the second operation state (latency mode B), the special result (2R latency) that becomes the high probability state and the normal operation state is not selected. Therefore, there is no transition from the latent mode B to the latent mode A where the selection ratio of 2R accuracy is low, and the possibility that the player is in an advantageous state increases, and the difference between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state increases. Can enhance the interest of the person.

  In the case of the second variation display game, 2R jackpot is not selected. That is, the special result (2R latency, support during 2R) that becomes the normal operation state or the second operation state is not selected. As a result, if the first or second operation state in which the winning to the second start winning opening is easier than the normal operation state, it is possible to reliably obtain the ball, and the first operation state continues. Since a possibility that a state advantageous for a player continues will increase, the difference between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state becomes large, and the interest of a game can be improved.

Next, details of the center case 40 in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described.
As shown in FIG. 8, the center case 40 is configured to include a front surface constituent member 600 on the front side of the display device 41 having the display unit 41 a and a back surface constituent member 700 having lower decoration effect members 753 a and 753 b and the like. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the front structural member 600 includes an annular base frame member 610, a left upper armor member 620, a left armor member 630, and a right armor that prevent an inflow of game balls flowing down from above the front structural member 600. A member 640, a warp device 650 that moves the game ball from the outside of the left side of the front component 600 to the inside, and a stage unit that rolls the game ball moved to the inside of the front component 600 via the warp device 650 A stage constituent member 660 having 662, a decorative light emitting member 670 that emits light from the frame portion of the front constituent member 600, and a decorative member 680 that decorates the frame portion of the front constituent member 600.

  The warp device 650 includes a warp inlet member 652 that forms an inlet of the device 650, and a warp passage member 654 that causes a game ball that has flowed into the device 650 to flow down to the stage portion 662.

  The warp inlet member 652 is formed so that a game ball that has flowed down from the outside of the left side portion of the front structural member 600 can flow in, and is formed so as to guide the game ball that has flowed into the member to the rear of the game board 30. Yes.

The warp passage member 654 includes a front passage member 654a and a rear passage member 654b.
The front passage member 654a has an upper end connected to the warp inlet member 652. The front passage member 654a can cause the game ball guided to the rear of the game board 30 by the warp inlet member 652 to flow downward to the right.
Further, the lower end portion of the front passage member 654a is formed to guide the game ball flowing down the passage member further to the rear of the game board 30.
The rear passage member 654b is a member that forms the rear wall of the front passage member 654a, and serves as a direction changing member that discharges the game ball guided to the rear of the game board 30 by the front passage member 654a to the stage portion 662. Yes.

  The decorative light emitting member 670 includes a left decorative light emitting member 672 that performs decorative light emission on the left side of the front structural member 600, an upper decorative light emitting member 674 that performs decorative light emission on the top of the front structural member 600, and a right side of the front structural member 600. And a right decorative light emitting member 676 for decoratively emitting light, and a lower decorative light emitting member 678 for decoratively emitting light at the lower part of the front structural member 600.

  The left decorative light emitting member 672 is a member that indirectly emits light mainly from the rear of the clear member and the warp device 650 provided on the left armor member 630, and includes a left LED board 672a on which a plurality of LEDs are disposed, and the left side And a left LED board cover member 672b that covers the LED board 672a from the rear.

  The upper decoration light-emitting member 674 is a member that indirectly emits light from the rear of a clear member provided mainly on the upper portion of the right armor member 640, and includes an upper LED substrate 674a in which a plurality of LEDs are disposed, and the upper LED substrate. And an upper LED board cover member 674b that covers 674a from the rear.

  The right decoration light emitting member 676 is, for example, a member that displays a degree of expectation to the big hit in the special figure variation display game by a level meter. Although not shown, the right decorative light emitting member 676 has a plurality of LEDs arranged at positions corresponding to the meter. An LED substrate and a right LED substrate cover member that covers the right LED substrate from the rear are provided.

The lower decorative light emitting member 678 is a member that mainly emits light indirectly from the rear of the stage constituent member 660, and includes a lower LED substrate 678a on which a plurality of LEDs are disposed, and a lower LED substrate cover that covers the lower LED substrate 678a from the rear Member 678b.
The lower LED substrate cover member 678b has an extending portion 678b1 extending upward from the stage portion 662 of the stage constituting member 660. Thereby, the extending part 678b1 prevents the game ball rolling on the stage part 662 from entering the rear side of the stage part 662. The extending portion 678b1 is formed of a clear member, and the lower movable effect member 751 and the lower decorative effect members 753a and 753b disposed on the rear side of the extended portion 678b1 are arranged from the front side of the game board 30. Visible.

  The decorative member 680 includes an upper left decorative member 681 that decorates the upper left portion of the front structural member 600, a left armor member decorative member 682 that decorates the left armor member 630, and a warp device decorative member 683 that decorates the front surface of the warp device 650. The lower decorative members 684 and 685 that decorate the lower part of the front component 600 and the lower right decorative members 686 and 687 that decorate the lower right part of the front component 600 are provided.

The lower right decorative member 686 is disposed so as to protrude to the front side of the game board 30 (see FIG. 35). Thereby, even when the game ball flowing down the lower right of the center case 40 collides with the obstacle nail and jumps up, the lower right decorative member 686 is provided to protrude from the front side of the game board 30. The lower right decorative member 686 becomes an obstacle, and the game ball can be prevented from entering the stage portion 662.
Further, the lower right decorative member 686 includes a ball flow lower opening 686a that guides the game ball jumped on the upper surface thereof to the start winning opening 36 disposed at the lower left of the lower right decorative member 686.

Next, details of the back surface component 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.
10 is a front view of the back surface component member 700, FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the back surface member 700, FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the back surface member 700, and FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable effect device 750, and FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the first movable effect device 730, the second movable effect device 760, and the third movable effect device 770 constituting the back surface component 700.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the back surface component 700 includes a box-shaped control base member 710 having an open front surface, a drive base member 720 disposed at the bottom of the control base member 710, and the drive The first movable effect device 730 and the upper decoration effect device 740 disposed above the base member 720, the lower movable effect device 750 disposed below the drive base member 720, and the left side of the drive base member 720. A second movable effect device 760 disposed in the section, and a third movable effect device 770 disposed on the right side of the drive base member 720.

The control base member 710 is made of a transparent material (clear member), and a rectangular opening 710 a is formed at the center of the control member 710 so as to correspond to the display unit 41 a of the display device 41.
Further, the control base member 710 includes a plate-like peripheral wall 710 b extending forward on the outer periphery of the control base member 710. The front end portion of the peripheral wall 710 b is connected to the game board 30 and the front component member 600.

The drive base member 720 is made of a transparent or translucent flat plate member, and has a rectangular opening at the center of the drive base member 720 so as to correspond to the display portion 41a of the display device 41, similarly to the control base member 710. 720a is formed.
In addition, upper guide grooves 726a and 726b for guiding a first movable effect member 731 (described later) are provided on the upper portion of the drive base member 720, and an interlocking movable effect member 762 (described later) is provided on the left side of the drive base member 720. ) Are provided on the right side of the drive base member 720, and right guide grooves 724a-c are provided on the right side of the drive base member 720 for guiding an interlocking movable effect member 772 (described later).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the upper decoration effect device 740 includes a disk-shaped disk decoration member 741, a first auxiliary decoration member 742 that decorates the vicinity of the disk decoration member 741, and a logo type (for example, a game A logo type decoration member 743 formed with a title of the machine 10), a second auxiliary decoration member 744 that decorates the vicinity of the logo type decoration member 743, and a plurality of LEDs that irradiate these decoration members with light from behind. An LED board 745, a front cover member 746 that protects the front surface of the LED board 745, a disk decoration member 741, a logo type decoration member 743, and an upper decoration effect base member 747 for attaching the LED board 745. I have.

The disc decoration member 741 is formed of a transparent or translucent clear member, and includes a mounting boss 741 a for attaching the first auxiliary decoration member 742 to the lower left portion of the disc decoration member 741.
The first auxiliary decorative member 742 is a decorative member that imitates a flower, and includes a protrusion 742a that can be attached to the attachment boss 741a on the back surface thereof.

The logo type decorative member 743 is formed of a transparent or translucent clear member, and includes a protrusion 743a for attaching the second auxiliary decorative member 744 on the right side of the logo type decorative member 743.
The second auxiliary decorative member 744 is a decorative member imitating a flower, and includes a mounting boss 744 a that can be attached to the protrusion 743 a at the upper left portion of the second auxiliary decorative member 744.

  The LED board 745 has positioning holes 745a, 745a,... That can be inserted into positioning bosses 747a, 747a,... Provided on the upper decoration effect base member 747 on the plane of the board. The LED board 745 has a plurality of screw holes for attaching the disk decoration member 741 and the logo type decoration member 743 to the upper decoration effect base member 747.

  The front cover member 746 is a cover member that prevents a member of another device from coming into contact with the LED disposed on the LED substrate 745. Similarly to the LED substrate 745, the front cover member 746 has positioning holes 746a, 746a,... That can be inserted into positioning bosses 747a, 747a,. A plurality of screw holes for attaching the member 741 and the logo type decorative member 743 to the upper decorative effect base member 747 are provided.

  As described above, the upper decoration effect base member 747 is a base member for attaching the disk decoration member 741, the logo type decoration member 743, and the LED board 745, and the first drive of the first movable effect device 730 described later. It is a member having a function as a cover member that covers the front side of the mechanism unit 732, the second drive mechanism unit 763 of the second movable effect device 760, and the third drive mechanism unit 773 of the third movable effect device 770.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the lower movable effect device 750 includes a lower movable effect member 751, a lower movable effect member driving unit 752 that drives the lower movable effect member 751, and a lower decoration that decorates both sides of the lower movable effect member 751. Production members 753a and 753b are provided.

The downward movable effect member 751 can reciprocate in the vertical direction by the driving force of the downward movable effect member drive unit 752.
Specifically, the downward movable effect member 751 is in a position that does not overlap the display unit 41a of the display device 41 when viewed from the front side of the game board 30 when in the initial state. When there is an output from the lower movable effect member driving unit 752, the lower movable effect member 751 moves upward and is held at a position overlapping the display unit 41a in the front-rear direction for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first movable effect device 730 has a first movable effect member 731, a first drive mechanism unit 732 that drives the first movable effect member 731, and a driving force by the first drive mechanism unit 732. The 1st transmission mechanism part 733 which transmits to the 1st movable effect member 731 and the position detection sensor 734 for detecting the initial position of the 1st movable effect member 731 are provided.

  The first movable effect member 731 is configured by a member simulating a temporary surface, and has two insertion holes (not shown) into which one end sides of the connection pins 733c and 733c can be fitted on the back surface. The first movable effect member 731 is provided with the insertion hole at a position that is symmetrical.

  The first drive mechanism portion 732 is a first drive mechanism portion cover member that fixes the first drive motor 732a, the first drive gear portion 732b, and the first drive motor 732a and covers the front side of the first drive gear portion 732b. 732c.

  The first drive gear portion 732b includes a drive gear 732b1 that is pivotally supported by the motor shaft 732a1 of the first drive motor 732a, a first driven gear 732b2 and a second driven gear 732b3 that mesh with the drive gear 732b1, respectively, A third driven gear 732b4 that meshes with the driven gear 732b3 (see FIG. 19).

The first driven gear 732b2 meshes with a gear portion 733a1a provided at one end of a first left arm member 733a1 described later. The third driven gear 732b4 meshes with a gear portion 733a2a provided at one end of a first right arm member 733a2 described later.
The first to third driven gears 732b2 to 4 are spur gears having the same number of teeth and a pitch circle. Since the third driven gear 732b4 is interposed between the second driven gear 732b3 and the drive gear 732b3 as described above, when the drive gear 732b1 is rotated, the third driven gear 732b4 is Although it rotates at the same rotational speed as the driven gear 732b2, it rotates in the reverse rotation direction. Therefore, the first left arm member 733a1 and the first right arm member 733a2 are symmetrical and can be moved simultaneously.

  The first transmission mechanism unit 733 includes a first arm member 733a, a second arm member 733b that is rotatably connected to one end of the first arm member 733a, the second arm member 733b, and the first movable effect member 731. Are provided with a connecting pin 733c and a torsion spring 733d.

  The first arm member 733a includes a first left arm member 733a1 and a first right arm member 733a2. The first left arm member 733a1 and the first right arm member 733a2 are composed of a pair of left and right symmetrical members. Only the details of the first left arm member 733a1 will be described below, and the first right arm member 733a2 will be described. Is omitted.

The first left arm member 733a1 includes a gear portion 733a1a at one end thereof (see FIG. 19). The first left arm member 733a1 can be rotated around the one end side where the gear portion 733a1a is provided by engaging the gear portion 733a1a and the first driven gear 732b2. .
Further, the first left arm member 733a1 is rotatably connected to a second left arm member 733b1 described later via a connection pin on the surface side on the other end side. The first left arm member 733a1 includes a regulation pin 733a1b for regulating the rotation range of the first left arm member 733a1 on the back surface on the other end side. The regulation pin 733a1b is inserted into the upper guide groove 726a and can slide in the upper guide groove 726a.

The second arm member 733b includes a second left arm member 733b1 and a second right arm member 733b2. The second left arm member 733b1 and the second right arm member 733b2 are composed of a pair of symmetrical members.
Hereinafter, the details of the second left arm member 733b1 will be described, and only the portions of the second right arm member 733b2 that are different from the second left arm member 733b1 will be described.

One end of the second left arm member 733b1 is rotatably connected to the first left arm member 733a1 via a connection pin. The second left arm member 733b1 includes a gear portion 733b1a at the other end, and meshes with the gear portion 733b2a provided on the second right arm member 733b2.
The second right arm member 733b2 includes a projecting piece 733b2b at the end connected to the first right arm member 733a2, and the position detection sensor 734 detects the projecting piece 733b2b, whereby the first movable effect. The initial position of the member 731 can be detected.

  The connection pins 733c and 733c are a pair of left and right members, one end of which is inserted into the gear portion 733b1a and 733b2a, and the other end is fitted into the back surface of the first movable effect member 731.

  The torsion springs 733d and 733d are a pair of left and right members, which are provided around the rotation center portions of the first left arm member 733a1 and the first right arm member 733a2, respectively, and the restoring force causes the first movable effect member 731 to move to the initial position. It is used to assist the operation when returning to.

  The position detection sensor 734 is a sensor for detecting that the first movable effect member 731 is in the initial position, and is disposed in the vicinity of the upper end of the upper guide groove 726 (see FIG. 19).

  As shown in FIG. 14, the second movable effect device 760 drives the second movable effect member 761, the interlocking movable effect member 762 that moves in conjunction with the second movable effect member 761, and the second movable effect member 761. A second drive mechanism 763 and a position detection sensor 764 for detecting the initial position of the second movable effect member 761 are provided.

  The second movable effect member 761 includes an upper left movable effect member 761a and a lower left movable effect member 761b.

  The upper left movable effect member 761a includes a front side upper left movable effect member 761a1, a rear surface side upper left movable effect member 761a2, an LED board 761a3 and a projecting piece held between the front surface side upper left movable effect member 761a1 and the rear surface side upper left movable effect member 761a2. 761a4 and a torsion spring 761a5.

The front side upper left movable effect member 761a1 includes a heart-shaped front side upper left main body part 761a1a and a front side upper left arm part 761a1b.
One end of the front-side upper left arm portion 761a1b is connected to the front-side upper left main body portion 761a1a, the other end is connected to a fourth driven gear 763b5 of the second drive mechanism portion 763, which will be described later, and the other end side is the center of rotation. Can be rotated as.

  The torsion spring 761a5 is provided around the rotation center portion of the upper left movable effect member 761a, and is used for assisting the operation when the restoring force returns the upper left movable effect member 761a to the initial position.

The back side upper left movable effect member 761a2 includes a heart-shaped back side upper left main body part 761a2a and a back side upper left arm part 761a2b.
The back side upper left main body portion 761a2a has a long hole 761a2a1 through which a connecting pin 762a2 of an upper left interlocking movable effect member 762a described later is inserted on the plane (see FIG. 26).

  The lower left movable effect member 761b is an LED substrate (not shown) sandwiched between the front side lower left movable effect member 761b1, the rear surface side lower left movable effect member 761b2, the front surface side lower left movable effect member 761b1, and the rear surface side lower left movable effect member 761b2. And.

The front side lower left movable effect member 761b1 includes a heart-shaped front side lower left main body part 761b1a and a lower left arm part 761b1b.
One end of the lower left arm portion 761b1b is connected to the front lower left main body portion 761b1a, the other end is connected to a second driven gear 763b3 of the second drive mechanism portion 763 described later, and the other end side rotates around the other end side. It is possible to move.

  The lower left arm portion 761b1b includes a restricting portion 761b1b1 for restricting the operating range of the lower left arm portion 761b1b in the middle of the arm. The restriction portion 761b1b1 includes a restriction pin 761b1b2, and is inserted into a long hole 763c1 provided in a drive mechanism base member 763c described later.

The back side lower left movable effect member 761b2 includes a heart-shaped back side lower left main body part 761b2a (see FIG. 15).
The back side lower left main body portion 761b2a has a long hole 761b2a1 through which a connecting pin 762b2 of a lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b described later is inserted on the plane.

  The linked movable effect member 762 includes an upper left linked movable effect member 762a linked to the upper left movable effect member 761a and a lower left linked movable effect member 762b linked to the lower left movable effect member 761b.

The upper left interlocking motion effect member 762a includes a guide pin 762a1 that guides the destination of the upper left interlocking motion effect member 762a and a connection pin 762a2 that is connected to the upper left movable effect member 761a.
The guide pin 762a1 protrudes toward the rear of the upper left interlocking movable effect member 762a and is inserted through the left guide groove 722a. The connecting pin 762a2 protrudes toward the front of the upper left interlocking movable effect member 762a and is inserted into the long hole 761a2a1 of the back surface upper left main body 761a2a.

The lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b includes a first guide pin 762b1 and a second guide pin 762b2 for guiding the destination of the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b, and a connecting pin 762b3 connected to the lower left movable effect member 761b. .
The first guide pin 762b1 protrudes toward the rear of the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b and is inserted into the left guide groove 722b. Similarly to the first guide pin 762b1, the second guide pin 762b2 protrudes toward the rear of the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b and is inserted into the left guide groove 722c. The connection pin 762b3 protrudes toward the front of the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b, and is inserted into the long hole 761b2a1 of the back side lower left main body portion 761b2a.

  The second drive mechanism section 763 includes a second drive motor 763a, a second drive gear section 763b, a drive mechanism section base member 763c that fixes the second drive motor 763a and arranges the second drive gear section 763b, It has.

  The second drive gear portion 763b includes a drive gear 763b1 that is pivotally supported by the motor shaft 763a1 of the second drive motor 763a, a first driven gear 763b2 that meshes with the drive gear 763b1, and a mesh with the first driven gear 763b2. Second driven gear 763b3, a third driven gear 763b4 meshing with the second driven gear 763b3, and a fourth driven gear 763b5 meshing with the third driven gear 763b4 (FIGS. 15 and 37). reference).

The lower left arm 761b1b is connected to the second driven gear 763b3, and the lower left movable effect member 761b can be rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the second driven gear 763b3.
The front left upper arm portion 761a1b is connected to the fourth driven gear 763b5, and the upper left movable effect member 761a can be rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the fourth driven gear 763b5.

The drive mechanism base member 763c has a long hole 763c1 through which the restriction pin 761b1b2 of the lower left arm 761b1b can be inserted on the left side.
The drive mechanism base member 763c includes the second drive motor 763a and the second drive gear 763b, and the third drive motor 773a and the third drive gear 773b of the third drive mechanism 773. Can be done.

  The position detection sensor 764 is a sensor for detecting that the upper left movable effect member 761a is in the initial position. Specifically, the position detection sensor 764 can detect the upper left movable effect member 761a by detecting the protrusion 761a4. It can be done.

As shown in FIG. 14, third movable effect device 770 drives third movable effect member 771, interlocked movable effect member 772 that moves in conjunction with third movable effect member 771, and third movable effect member 771. A third drive mechanism 773 and a position detection sensor 774 for detecting the initial position of the third movable effect member 771 are provided.
Note that the second movable effect device 760 and the third movable effect device 770 are composed of left and right symmetrical members, and the third movable effect device 770 will be described only for parts that are different from the second movable effect device 760.

  The lower right arm portion 771b1b includes a restriction portion 771b1b1 for restricting the operation range of the lower right arm portion 771b1b in the middle of the arm. The restriction portion 771b1b1 includes a restriction pin 771b1b2, and is inserted into a long hole 728a of a long hole forming member 728 provided in the drive base member 720.

Next, the operation | movement aspect of the 1st movable production | presentation apparatus 730 is demonstrated using FIGS. 15-23.
Here, the first drive mechanism unit 732 is controlled by the effect control device 300 so as to operate when the second drive mechanism unit 763 and the third drive mechanism unit 773 are not operated.

  15 and 16 are front views of the back surface component member 700 showing a state before the operation of the first movable effect member 731. Specifically, FIG. 15 shows a state in which the first movable effect member 731 is removed. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the first movable effect member 731 is attached. 15 to 23 are diagrams in a state in which the upper decoration effect device 740, the lower movable effect device 750, the second movable effect device 760, the third movable effect device 770, and the like are removed for convenience of explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the first transmission mechanism 733 of the first movable effect device 730 includes a first left arm member 733a1, a first right arm member 733a2, a second left arm member 733b1, and a second right arm member 733a2. The rhombus link mechanism is composed of the four-section links. The first movable effect member 731 connected to the end portions of the second left arm member 733b1 and the second right arm member 733a2 can be moved up and down.

  As shown in FIG. 16, when the first movable effect member 731 is in the initial position, the first movable effect member 731 does not overlap the front surface of the display unit 41 a of the display device 41 when viewed from the front of the game board 30. In position. At this time, the position detection sensor 734 detects the protrusion 733b2b of the second right arm member 733b2 to detect that the first movable effect member 731 is in the initial position (see FIG. 15).

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are rear views of the back surface component member 700 showing a state before the operation of the first movable effect member 731. Specifically, FIG. 17 shows a state in which the first movable effect member 731 is removed. FIG. 18 and FIG. 18 are views showing a state in which the first movable effect member 731 is attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the first movable effect member 731 is in the initial position, the restriction pins 733a1b and 733a2b are at the upper ends of the corresponding upper guide grooves 726 and 726, respectively.

  FIGS. 19 to 21 are views of the back surface component member 700 showing a state in which the first movable effect member 731 is operating (lowering). Specifically, FIG. 19 is attached with the first movable effect member 731. FIG. 20 is a rear view of FIG. 19, and FIG. 21 is a front view of the rear surface component 700 with the first movable effect member 731 removed.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 21, when the first left arm member 733a1 and the first right arm member 733a2 rotate, the second left arm member 733b1 constituting the rhombus link mechanism is parallel to the first right arm member 733a2. The second right arm member 733b2 moves so as to be parallel to the first left arm member 733a1 and is connected to the ends of the second left arm member 733b1 and the second right arm member 733b2. The 1st movable production | generation member 731 made will fall.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 20, the regulation pins 733a1b and 733a2b slide on the inner walls of the corresponding upper guide grooves 726a and 726b, respectively.

  22 and 23 are views of the back surface component member 700 showing a state in which the first movable effect member 731 has been lowered. Specifically, FIG. 22 is a front view of the back surface component member 700 at this time, and FIG. 23 is a rear view of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, when the first left arm member 733a1 and the first right arm member 733a2 further rotate, the second left arm member 733b1 further moves so as to be parallel to the first right arm member 733a2. In addition, the second right arm member 733b2 moves so as to be parallel to the first left arm member 733a1, and the first movable effect connected to the ends of the second left arm member 733b1 and the second right arm member 733b2. The member 731 further descends and is disposed at a position overlapping the front surface of the display unit 41a. At this time, the regulation pins 733a1b and 733a2b reach the lower ends of the corresponding upper guide grooves 726a and 726b, respectively.

Next, the operation | movement aspect of the 2nd movable production | presentation apparatus 760 is demonstrated using FIGS. 24-31.
Here, the second drive mechanism unit 763 is controlled by the effect control device 300 so as to operate when the first drive mechanism unit 732 and the third drive mechanism unit 773 are not operated.

24 and 25 are views of the back surface component member 700 showing that the second movable effect member 761 is in operation but the interlocking movable effect member 762 is not in operation.
24 to 31 are diagrams in a state where the upper decoration effect device 740, the lower movable effect device 750, the third movable effect device 770, and the like are removed for convenience of explanation.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, when the second movable effect member 761 starts operating, the upper left movable effect member 761a and the lower left movable effect member 761b constituting the second movable effect member 761 are respectively in front of the display unit 41a. Will move from the left to the center.

26 and 27 are views of the back surface component member 700 showing that the second movable effect member 761 is still operating and immediately before the interlocking movable effect member 762 starts operating.
As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the upper left movable effect member 761a and the lower left movable effect member 761b are further moved from the left side of the front surface of the display unit 41a toward the center, respectively, so that the upper left interlocking member constituting the interlocking movable effect member 762 is formed. The connecting pin 762a2 of the movable effect member 762a contacts the left end of the long hole 761a2a1 of the upper left movable effect member 761a, and the connecting pin 762b3 of the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b is the left end of the long hole 761b2a1 of the lower left movable effect member 761b. Will come into contact.

28 and 29 are views of the back surface component member 700 showing a state in which the interlocking movable effect member 762 starts operating in conjunction with the second movable effect member 761.
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper left movable effect member 761a and the lower left movable effect member 761b are further moved from the left side of the front surface of the display unit 41a toward the center, respectively, so that the upper left interlocking movable effect connected by the connecting pin 762a2. The effect member 762a is pulled out from the left side of the front surface of the display unit 41a toward the center, and the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b connected by the connecting pin 762b3 is pulled out from the left side of the front surface of the display unit 41a toward the center. . At this time, as shown in FIG. 29, the guide pin 762a1 of the upper left interlocking movable effect member 762a slides in the left guide groove 722a. Further, the first guide pin 762b1 of the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b slides in the left guide groove 722b, and the second guide pin 762b2 slides in the left guide groove 722c.

30 and 31 are views of the back surface component 700 showing a state in which the second movable effect member 761 and the interlocking movable effect member 762 have finished moving from the left side to the center of the front surface of the display unit 41a.
As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, when the second movable effect member 761 and the interlocking movable effect member 762 have finished moving from the left side to the center of the front surface of the display unit 41a, the guide pin 762a1 of the upper left interlocking effect effect member 762a is It has reached the right end of the left guide groove 722a. Further, the first guide pin 762b1 of the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b reaches the right end of the left guide groove 722b, and the second guide pin 762b2 reaches the right end of the left guide groove 722c.

Next, the relationship between the position after the operation of the first movable effect member 731 and the position after the operations of the second movable effect member 761 and the third movable effect member 771 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 32A is a diagram showing the position after the operation of the second movable effect member 761 and the third movable effect member 771, and FIG. 32B is a diagram showing the position after the operation of the first movable effect member 731. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the first movable effect member 731 has a position after the operation of the first movable effect member 731 in the upper left side on the back side after the operation of the second movable effect member 761. On the vertical line A connecting the approximate centers of the portion 761a2a and the back side lower left main body portion 761b2a, and the approximate centers of the back side upper right main body portion 771a2a and the back side lower right main body portion 771b2a after the operation of the third movable effect member 771. It is provided so as to be on a vertical line segment B to be connected.

  Next, the decoration space S for arranging the downward movable effect device 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36.

As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the decoration space S is a space provided between the extending portion 678b1 disposed behind the stage portion 662 and the drive base member 720 disposed behind the extending portion 678b1. It is designed to be provided.
Further, as shown in FIG. 34, when viewed from the side of the game board 30, the first movable effect member 731, the second movable effect member 761, and the interlocking movable effect member within the space having substantially the same width as the decoration space S. It is comprised so that 762 may be stored in an overlapping state. Although not shown, the third movable effect member 771 and the interlocking movable effect member 772 are also stored in a state where they overlap with the first movable effect member 731, the second movable effect member 761, and the interlocking movable effect member 762. It is comprised so that.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the second lower guide pin 762b2 slides in the left guide groove 722c provided in the lower left portion of the drive base member 720, so that the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b is movable. The lower decoration effect member 753a is arranged on the front side of the drive base member 720 with a predetermined interval so as not to collide with the lower left interlocking movable effect member 762b.
Further, the lower decoration effect member 753b is also arranged at a predetermined interval on the front surface side of the drive base member 720 so as not to collide with the lower right interlocking movable effect member 772b.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment moves to the front side of the display device 41 having the display unit 41a capable of displaying a special figure variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner. Movable effect units (first movable effect device 730, second movable effect device 760, third movable effect member) having movable effect members (first movable effect member 731, second movable effect member 761, third movable effect member 771) to be performed. A gaming machine including a center unit (center case 40) provided with a device 770), and a plurality of movable effect units (first movable effect device 730, second movable effect device 760, and third movable effect device 770). Is a drive source (first drive mechanism unit 732, second drive mechanism unit 763, third drive mechanism unit 773) for driving the movable effect member provided in the movable effect unit. The drive source is controlled so as to operate when the movable effect unit other than the movable effect unit including the drive source is not operated, and each of the movable effect members provided in the plurality of movable effect units is operated by the corresponding drive source. By doing so, the display device 41 moves to a predetermined area on the front side, and the predetermined area is shared by a plurality of movable effect members.

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the drive source is controlled to operate when the drive source of the movable effect unit other than the movable effect unit including the drive source is not activated. Therefore, the plurality of movable effect members do not move at the same time, and it is possible to avoid wondering which of the operations of the plurality of movable effect members should be noted.
In addition, each movable effect member moves to a predetermined area on the front side of the display device 41 when the drive source is operated, and the predetermined area is shared by the plurality of movable effect members, so that the line of sight is greatly shifted. There is no need to make it easy to recognize, and it is possible to perform an operation effect by a plurality of movable effect members that enhance interest.

  Further, when attention is paid to a region on one side of the vertical center line of the center unit (center case 40), each movable effect member (first movable effect member 731, second movable effect member 761, third movable effect member 771). In this state, the respective lower ends are positioned on the same vertical line.

  Therefore, when attention is paid to the area on one side of the vertical center line of the center unit, the respective lower ends are positioned on the same vertical line in a state where each movable effect member has moved to the predetermined area, so it is necessary to shift the line of sight much. Therefore, it is possible to perform an operation effect by a plurality of movable effect members that are easy to recognize and enhance the interest.

  Also, each movable effect member (first movable effect member 731 and second movable effect member 761) provided in a plurality of movable effect units (first movable effect device 730, second movable effect device 760, and third movable effect device 770). When the third movable effect member 771) is in the initial position, the third movable effect member 771) is configured to be stored in a state of being overlapped in a space having a predetermined width when viewed from the side surface of the gaming machine 10.

  Therefore, when each movable effect member is in the initial position, each movable effect member is arranged so as to be stored in a state of being overlapped in a space having a predetermined width when viewed from the side surface of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, space saving of each movable effect member can be achieved.

  The center unit (center case 40) extends in the left-right direction in front of the display device 41 and a warp device 650 for allowing game balls flowing down the game area 32 to flow into the center unit. The stage ball 662 in which the game ball that has flowed into the center unit rolls is provided between the stage unit 662 and the display device 41, and the game ball rolling in the stage portion 662 collides with the display device 41. A wall portion (extension portion 678b1) that prevents the above-described problem, a space having the predetermined width is formed between the display device 41 and the wall portion, and a decorative member (downward movable effect device 750) is provided in the space. A decorative space portion (decorative space S) that can be disposed is provided.

  Therefore, not only a space having a predetermined width for storing each movable effect member is formed between the display device 41 and the wall portion, but also the decoration space portion in which the decoration member can be disposed in the space. The space can be used effectively.

  In addition, one movable effect unit (first movable effect device 730) of the plurality of movable effect units (first movable effect device 730, second movable effect device 760, and third movable effect device 770) is a drive source ( The transmission mechanism unit (first transmission mechanism unit 733) transmits the power of the first drive mechanism unit 732) to the movable effect member (first movable effect member 731), and the transmission mechanism unit converts the rotation operation to A rhombus link mechanism that linearly moves the movable effect member is provided.

  Therefore, since the transmission mechanism unit uses a rhombus link mechanism that converts the rotational operation to linearly move the movable effect member, the movable effect member can be linearly moved by a simple mechanism.

  Next, control of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 38, first, an interrupt prohibition process (step S1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. S2), a stack pointer setting process (step S3) for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs, and an interrupt mode setting process (step S4) for setting an interrupt processing mode. )I do.

  Next, in order to wait for the program of the payout control apparatus (payout board) 200 to start up normally, for example, a time of 4 msec is waited (step S5). As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, thereby avoiding the payout control device 200 from losing the command. be able to. Thereafter, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted, and all output ports are set to off (no output) (steps S6 and S7). In addition, the serial port ((port previously installed in the gaming microcomputer 111) is not used in this embodiment because it is in parallel communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300). Processing is performed (step S8).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 is turned on (step S9). If it is determined that the initialization switch is off (step S9; No), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (step S10). (Step S11; Yes), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (Step S12). Next, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S13; Yes), the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is calculated (step S14), and the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power interruption are calculated. Compare (step S15) and determine whether they match (step S16). And when it corresponds (step S16; Yes), it transfers to step S17 of FIG. 39, and performs the process at the time of recovering normally from a power failure.

  When the initialization switch is determined to be on (step S9; Yes), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S11; No or step S13; No), the checksum Is determined to be not normal (step S16; No), the process proceeds to step S24 in FIG. 39 to perform initialization processing.

  In step S17 of FIG. 39, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared (step S18), and the areas related to errors and fraud monitoring are reset (step S19). Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20). If it is determined that the probability is not high (step S20; No), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.

  If it is determined in step S20 that the probability is high (step S20; Yes), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S21), and the high probability notification LED (for example, provided in the batch display device 50) The ON (lighted) data of the error indicator is saved in the segment area (step S22). And the process (step S23) which transmits the command at the time of the power recovery corresponding to the process number prepared in order to rationally perform the below-mentioned special figure game process is performed (step S23), and it progresses to step S29 .

On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S24, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S24), and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. (Step S25), the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (Step S26). And the time value of the period which outputs the external information regarding RWM clear is set (step S27), the command at the time of power-on is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 (step S28), and it progresses to step S29. In step S29, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

  The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Then, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are changed to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2) Then, after saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the normal hit in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31), the interruption is permitted (step S32). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S33) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, although not particularly limited, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number (big hit random number) generated in a random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a soft random number generated by software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S33, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S34), and the power failure monitoring signal is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S35). If the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S35; No), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S33). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step S33 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S35; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is in the ON state for the number of checks set in step S34 (step S36). And when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks (step S36; No), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S35; Yes). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is ON for the number of checks (step S36; Yes), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S37), all A process of outputting OFF data to the output port (step S38) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (step S39), and the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (step S40). Further, after performing the process of calculating the checksum when the RWM is turned off (step S41) and the process of saving the checksum (step S42), the process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step S43) is performed. Wait until the gaming machine is powered off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111A, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 40 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, a register saving process (step S51) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is first transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, an input process (step S52) for taking in inputs from various sensors (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, usual gate switch 34a, count switch 38a, etc.), that is, reading the state of each input port. )I do. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S53) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening SOL38b, general electric power SOL37c) and the like is performed.

  Next, a command transmission process (step S54), a random number update process 1 (step S55), and a random number update process 2 (steps) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, and the like. S56) is performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the general winning port switch 35a... 35n, and the count switch 38a, and an error is monitored. A prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S57) for performing (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S58) for performing a process related to the special figure variable display game and a general figure game process (step S59) for performing a process related to the general map variable display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S60), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays various types of information related to display of special figure variation games and games, to display a desired content, magnetic sensor switch 61 And the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S61) which checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor switch 62 and determines whether there is any abnormality is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S62) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S63), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S51 (step S64), and a process of permitting the interrupt (step S64) Step S65) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S58) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the special figure game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.

  Next, a count switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this count switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the count number of the count switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, the special figure game process timer is updated (-1), and it is checked whether the game process timer has already expired or has been expired (step A3). If it is determined that the timer has timed up (step A4; Yes), a process (step A5) for setting a special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is performed. Then, the process (step A6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is performed using the table. Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step A7), the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the game process number.

  If the game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed. The details of the special figure routine process (step A9) will be described later.

  In step A8, when the game process number is “1”, a special figure changing process (step for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc.) A10) is performed. In step A8, if the game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of the big hit or a big winning opening opening pattern for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the setting, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  If the game process number is “3” in step A8, the fanfare / setting for setting the opening time of the big prize opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big prize opening, etc. Processing during the interval (step A12) is performed. If the game process number is “4” in step A8, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a big prize winning ball remaining ball process A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the game process number is “5” in step A8, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and the big hit end process are performed. The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for the game is performed. If the game process number is “6” in step A8, a big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed.

  In step A8, if the special figure game process number is “7”, the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the mid-small process are performed. Therefore, a small hitting fanfare process (step A16) for setting information necessary for the purpose is performed. If the special figure game process number is “8” in step A8, a small hitting process (step A17) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. I do.

  In step A8, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big prize opening during the small hitting process, A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the end process is performed. If the special figure game process number is “10” in step A8, a small hit end process (step A19) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process (step A9) is performed. .

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A20), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A21) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A22), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A23) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has not expired (step A4; No), the process proceeds to step A20, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting the hold information by the first start port (start winning prize port 36) (step A111), the special drawing start port switch common process (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A117.

  Next, it is checked whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won. If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A113; Yes), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; No), it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (step A114), processing for determining whether or not the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determination (step A115). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

  If it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; No), a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A116). ), Special chart start port common processing (step A117) is performed, and start port switch monitoring processing is terminated. If it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; Yes), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A112 and A117) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the special-purpose start port switch common process, first, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, an input is made to the monitored start port switch (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a). Is checked (step A201), and if it is determined that there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A202; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A202 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A202; Yes), the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch is saved (step A203), and then the monitoring is performed. The big hit random number extracted is loaded into the target hard random number latch register and prepared (step A204).

  Subsequently, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times of output (start port signal output number) is updated (+1), and it is checked whether or not the output number overflows (step A205), and it is determined that the output number does not overflow (step A206; No). Then, the updated value is saved in the start port signal output frequency area of the RWM (step A207), and the process proceeds to step A208. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A206 that the number of outputs overflows (step A206; Yes), the process proceeds to step A208.

  Then, in step A208, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the update target special figure holding corresponding to the monitored start port switch (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a, etc.) is held (start memory). It is checked whether or not the number is less than the upper limit value (step A208), and processing for determining whether or not the special figure holding number is less than the upper limit value (step A209) is performed.

  If it is determined in step A209 that the number of special figure holds is less than the upper limit (step A209; Yes), a process of updating (+1) the number of special figure hold to be updated (for example, the number of special figure hold 1) Step A214) is performed. After preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (MODE) of the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A215). Then, a decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A216), and a command setting process (step A217) is performed. Subsequently, a process of calculating the address of the random number save area corresponding to the special figure hold number (step A218) is performed, and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number save area of the RWM (step A219).

  Next, the big hit symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A220), and saved in the big hit symbol random number saving area of the RWM (step A221). Further, the corresponding variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the RWM random number save area (steps A222, A223, A224). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step A225) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of right to execute the variable display game as start memory based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. There is also a start storage means for extracting and storing a random number for determining whether or not a special result is obtained for each start storage. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. The random number value stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (step A209; No), it is checked whether or not the input of the start port switch related to step A202 is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a. (Step A210), if it is determined that the input of the start port 1 switch 36a is (Step A211; Yes), a decoration special figure hold number command (overflow command) is prepared (Step A212), and command setting processing (Step A213) ) To complete the special figure start port switch common process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A211 that the input is not the start port 1 switch 36a (step A211; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A225) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 44, first, it is checked whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading effect are satisfied (step A231). If not satisfied (step A232; No), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . Moreover, when satisfy | filling (step A232; Yes), the process regarding the following prefetch effect is performed.

  Here, the case where the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied is a case where the input of the start port switch according to step A202 of the special-purpose start port switch common process is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. In addition, when the input of the start port switch related to step A202 of the special-purpose start port switch common processing is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the prefetch prohibition flag is not set, and the normal variable winning device 37 is extended and opened. The case where the function is not in operation, that is, the case where the function is not in the short-time state, and the case where it is not in the big hit (special game state).

  In the process related to the prefetch effect performed when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step A232; Yes), first, whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit. A big hit determination process (step A233) is performed to determine. If the determination result is a big hit (step A234; Yes), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start switch is set (step A235), the big hit symbol random number is checked and the corresponding winning information pointer Is acquired (step A236). Next, the jackpot information table address table is set (step A237), and the jackpot information table corresponding to the winning information pointer is acquired (step A238). Thereafter, the symbol information is acquired from the set information table and saved in the symbol information (work) area (step A243).

  On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A234; No), a small hit determination process (step A239) for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is determined. Do. When the determination result is a small hit (step A240; Yes), a small hit information table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A241), the symbol information is acquired from the set information table, and the symbol is set. A process of saving in the information (work) area (step A243) is performed. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A240; No), a loss information table is set (step A242), symbol information is acquired from the set information table, and is saved in the symbol information (work) area. (Step A243) is performed.

  After obtaining the symbol information from the set information table and performing the process (step A243) of saving in the symbol information (work) area, the start opening prize design command is obtained from the set information table, and the start opening prize is received. The effect symbol command is saved in the winning effect symbol command area of the RWM (step A244). Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, after preparing the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A245), the target start port winning effect command setting table is prepared ( Step A246). And the special figure information setting process (step A247) which sets the special figure information set regarding the start port of the said monitoring object is performed.

  Subsequently, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step A248) for setting the second half variation pattern among the variation modes in the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern setting process (step A248) for setting the variation aspect of the special figure variation display game ( Step A249) is performed. Note that the special figure information setting process in step A247, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step A248, and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A249 are respectively the special figure information setting process, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process, and the fluctuation pattern in the special figure ordinary process. This is the same as the setting process.

  Then, the start opening prize effect command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number of the set variation pattern is calculated and prepared (step A250), and the second half variation number value is prepared as the start opening prize effect command (ACTION). (Step A251), command setting processing (Step A252) is performed. Subsequently, a start opening winning effect command command is loaded and prepared from the winning effect symbol command area (step A253), a command setting process (step A254) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. That is, the start opening prize effect command is prepared in steps A250 and A251, and the start opening prize effect symbol command is prepared in step A253, so that the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory is obtained. , It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, in particular by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc. The result related information can be notified to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. From the above, the game control apparatus 100 serves as a pre-determination unit that determines the random number stored as the start-up memory in the start-up storage unit before the variable display game based on the start-up memory is executed.

  Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is checked whether or not the second special figure holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (step A301). When it is determined that the second special figure hold number is 0 (step A302; Yes), it is checked whether or not the first start memory number (first special figure hold number) is 0 (step A303). If it is determined that the number of first special figure hold is 0 (step A304; Yes), it is checked whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step A305), and the customer waiting demo has not started. That is, if it is determined that the process has not been started (step A306; No), a process of setting the customer waiting demo flag during the customer waiting demo (step A307) is performed.

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A308), and command setting processing (step A309) is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A305 that the customer waiting demo has already started (step A306; Yes), the customer waiting demo flag is already set during the customer waiting demo (step A307), and the customer waiting demo command is also prepared ( Since step A308) and command setting processing (step A309) are also executed, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A310) is performed without performing these processes, and the special figure normal process is terminated. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A310), a process for setting a process number “0” related to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize fraud monitoring information) defining a special prize mouth fraud monitoring period, etc. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A302 that the second special figure hold number is not 0 (step A302; No), a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A311) is performed, and a special figure fluctuation in-process transition setting process (special figure) is performed. 2) Perform (Step A312). In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A312), the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, the information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, and the changing of the second special figure Test signal, information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52 (for example, a flag relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52, a timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) Etc.), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step A304 that the number of first special figure hold is not 0 (step A304; No), a special figure 1 change start process (step A313) is performed, and a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure) is performed. 1) Perform (Step A314). In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A314), the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, the information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, and the changing of the first special figure Test signal, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 (for example, a flag relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51, a timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) Etc.), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

  In this way, the second special figure hold number in step A301 and step A302 is checked before the first special figure hold number check in step A303 and step A304, so that the second special figure hold number is zero. If not, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A311) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A313) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46, first, whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A320) is performed to set shift information and jackpot information for the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not. Thereafter, a small hit flag setting process (step A321) is performed for setting shift information or small hit information to the small hit flag for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A322) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), it corresponds to the special figure 1 stop symbol number of the set special figure 1 stop symbol. The test signal is saved (step A323). Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern information (symbol information) set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is loaded from the symbol information area (step A324) and saved in the symbol information area for work of the RWM (step A325). .

  Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step A326), and the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step A327). Subsequently, a target table for setting information regarding the variation pattern is prepared (step A328), and a special figure information setting process (step A329) for setting special figure information is performed. Subsequently, among the variation modes in the first special figure variation display game, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step A330) for setting the latter half variation pattern, the variation for setting the variation aspect of the first special figure variation display game. Pattern setting processing (step A331) is performed.

  Then, the fluctuation start information setting process (step A332) for setting the fluctuation start information of the first special figure is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended. In the variation start information setting process (step A332), a decoration pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command including information regarding the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, and the stop symbol pattern (stop result mode) information related to the decoration special diagram variation display game. A decoration special figure 1 hold number command (decoration special figure hold number command) related to the command and special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is prepared. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A311) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and is similar to the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, first, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a big hit. (Step A370) is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A371) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), it corresponds to the special figure 2 stop symbol number of the set special symbol 2 stop symbol. The test signal is saved (step A372). Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern information (symbol information) set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is loaded (step A373) and saved in the symbol information area for RWM work (step A374).

  Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step A375), and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step A376). Subsequently, a target table for setting information on the variation pattern is prepared (step A377), and special figure information setting processing (step A378) for setting special figure information is performed. Subsequently, among the variation modes in the second special figure variation display game, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step A379) for setting the latter half variation pattern, the variation for setting the variation aspect of the second special figure variation display game. Pattern setting processing (step A380) is performed.

  Thereafter, the fluctuation start information setting process (step A381) for setting the fluctuation start information of the second special figure is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended. In the variation start information setting process (step A381), the variation pattern command including information related to the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, and the decoration special diagram corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (stop result mode) information related to the decoration special diagram variation display game. A decoration special figure 2 hold number command (decoration special figure hold number command) related to the command and decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is prepared. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is checked whether or not the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit (step S1). A391). If it is a big hit (step A392; Yes), the game state is acquired (step A392), and a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table based on the acquired game state is prepared (step A394). The game state acquired here includes the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure display game and the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 (normal operation state, first operation state or second operation state). It is. In the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table selected according to this gaming state, a selection ratio of special results corresponding to each gaming state as shown in FIG. 6 is set, and thereby the current gaming state is set. Accordingly, the selection ratio of the special result (the selection ratio of the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 after the end of the special gaming state) is set.

  After that, the big hit symbol random number save area (for special figure 1) is loaded with the big hit symbol random number (step A395), the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired and prepared (step A396), and the acquired stop symbol is obtained. The number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A397). By this process, the type of special result is selected. Then, a stop symbol information setting process for setting a stop symbol is performed (step A398), a decorative special symbol command table is set (step A399), and a decorative special symbol command (ACTION) corresponding to the symbol information is acquired (step A399). A402).

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the stop symbol information setting process, symbol information corresponding to the target stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the symbol information area (step A411). As a result, the symbol of the special result is set. Then, the state determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the symbol information area (step A412). The state determination flag is for setting a probability state and an operation state after the special gaming state is finished. Thereafter, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A413), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step A414).

  Returning to FIG. 48, if it is not a big hit (step A392; No), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step A400), and the symbol information at the time of loss is saved in the symbol information area. , (Step A401), a special decoration command (ACTION) corresponding to the symbol information is acquired (step A402).

  After obtaining the decoration special figure command (ACTION) corresponding to the symbol information (step A402), the decoration special figure command (MODE) is set (step A403), and the command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A404). . Then, the jackpot symbol random number save area (for special figure 1) is cleared to 0 (step A405), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A371) in the special figure 2 variation start process described above, the same process is performed with the second special figure variation display game as the target of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. However, instead of the process of acquiring the gaming state (step A392) and the process of preparing the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table based on the acquired gaming state (step A394), the same special figure 2 regardless of the gaming state. A process of preparing a jackpot stop symbol information table is performed.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A329) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above and the special figure information setting process (step A378) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the special figure information setting process, first, the prepared flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag) is saved in the symbol discrimination flag (work) area as a flag indicating the target special figure. (Step A421).

  Next, as the information generation parameter 1, the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are added (step A422), and the information generation parameter 2 has no change in switching. Is set to "0" (step A423). The change of switching is the change pattern of the special figure change display game for the specified number of times (here, the 10th time) after shifting to the latent mode (including the case of entering the latent mode again) with 2R big hit or small hit. It is a special variation pattern.

  Then, it is checked whether or not there is a special variation switching flag (step A424). The special variation switching flag is a flag set for a special figure variation display game in which a special variation pattern is set. When there is no special variation flag (step A425; No), that is, when the special variation pattern is not set, a stay mode information setting process (step A427) is performed. When there is a special variation flag (step A425; Yes), that is, when a special variation pattern is set, a special variation switching execution flag is set as the information generation parameter 2 (step A426), and the stay mode information setting process (Step A427) is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the stay mode information setting process, first, the stay mode information is loaded as the information generation parameter 3 (step A441), and the current operation state of the normal variable winning device 37 is being supported by ordinary power (during the short-time state). ) (Step A442). If the power transmission is not being supported (step A442; No), it is determined whether the current probability state is a high probability state (step A443). If the current probability state is a high probability state (step A443; Yes), the information A value of high probability & no ordinary power support is set as the generation parameter 3 (step A447), and the stay mode information setting process is terminated. In this case, the production state is the latent mode A.

  Further, when the state is not a high probability state (step A443; No), it is determined whether the current effect state is the normal mode (step A444). When the mode is not the normal mode (step A444; No), that is, when the mode is the latent mode A, the value 2 is set as no information generation parameter 3 (step A445), and the stay mode information setting process is terminated. To do. If the current mode is the normal mode (step A444; Yes), the information generation parameter 3 is set to a value of 1 without ordinary power support (step A446), and the stay mode information setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the power transmission support is in progress (step A442; Yes), it is determined whether the current operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 is medium support (second operation state) (step A448). If it is medium support (step A448; Yes), a high probability & medium support value is set as the information generation parameter 3 (step A452), and the stay mode information setting process is terminated. In this case, the production state is the latent mode B. If it is not medium support (step A448; No), that is, if it is high support (first operation state), it is determined whether the current probability state is a high probability state (step A449).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A449; Yes), a value indicating high probability & normal power support is set as the information generation parameter 3 (step A450), and the stay mode information setting process is terminated. In this case, the effect state is a probability variation mode. If not in the high probability state (step A449; No), the information generation parameter 3 is set to a value with low probability and normal power support (step A451), and the stay mode information setting process is terminated. In this case, the production state is the time reduction mode.

  Returning to FIG. 50, after performing the above-described stay mode information setting process (step A427), the first half fluctuation information 1 is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 3 and saved in the first half fluctuation information 1 area (step A428). Based on the information generation parameter 3, the first half fluctuation information 2 is generated and saved in the first half fluctuation information 2 area (step A429). The first half variation information is information for determining the first half variation pattern until reaching the reach state among the variation patterns. The first half fluctuation information 1 is first half fluctuation information when the result is out of reach and the reach state is not reached. The first half variation information 1 is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 3 because the first half variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of special figure reservations. The first half fluctuation information 2 is first half fluctuation information when the result is out of reach and the reach state is reached or when the result is a big hit. In the first half fluctuation information 2, the first half fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure reservation number. It should be noted that at the time when the first half fluctuation information 1 and 2 are generated, which is used is not determined, and is determined with reference to other information generation parameters later.

  Next, as the information generation parameter 4, symbol information (for work) that is information related to the symbol in the case of a loss or a big hit is loaded (step A 430), and the special symbol variation display game is executed as the information generation parameter 5. A symbol determination flag (for work), which is information on which of the special drawings 1 and 2 is loaded, is loaded (step A431).

  Then, first-half variable group information is generated based on the information generation parameters 2, 4 and 5, and is saved in the target first-half variable group information area (step A432). Thereby, it is determined which of the first half variation information 1 and 2 is used. Thereafter, the latter-half variation group selection table pointer is generated and prepared based on the information generation parameters 1 to 5 (step A433), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.

  With the above processing, special figure information corresponding to the gaming state and the production state is set. When the special variation switching execution flag is set as the information generation parameter 2, special figure information for setting the special variation pattern is set. Using the special figure information set here, in the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A330 and A379), the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A331 and A380), and the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A332 and A381), The variation pattern is set according to the situation, and further, the 2R big hit or the small hit and the mode is changed to the latent mode (including the case where the latent mode is set again) (the 10th in this case). The variation pattern of the diagram variation display game can be a special variation pattern.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the special symbol changing process, first, it is checked whether the symbol information (stop symbol pattern information) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is an outlier symbol pattern. (Step A521).

  If the symbol information is a missing symbol (step A522; Yes), it is checked whether or not the latter half variation number set in the latter half variation pattern setting process is a number without reach (step A523). When the second-half variation number is a number without reach (step A524; Yes), a special figure display time pointer at the time of losing is set (step A525), and a special figure display time table is set (step A528). . Further, if the second half variation number is not a number without reach (step A524; No), that is, if there is a reach, the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game, and the reach state is reached. In this case, the special figure display time pointer at the time of the loss reach is set (step A526), and the special figure display time table is set (step A528).

  On the other hand, if the symbol information is not an outlier symbol (step A522; No), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, a special figure display time pointer at the time of a big hit or a small hit is set (step A527), and the special figure display time is set. Processing for setting a table (step A528) is performed.

  After performing the process for setting the special figure display time table (step A528), the process for obtaining the stop time corresponding to the special figure stop time pointer (step A529) is performed. In this process, the special figure stop time pointer at the time of detachment (at the time of detachment without occurrence of reach) set at step A525, the special figure stop time pointer at the time of detachment set at step A526, set at step A527 The stop time corresponding to one of the special figure stop time pointers at the big hit time or the small hit time is acquired.

  Then, the acquired special figure display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A530), the special figure display process transition setting process (step A531) is performed, and the special figure change process is terminated. In the special figure display process transition setting process (step A531), the process number “2” relating to the special figure display process, the test signal relating to the fluctuation stop of the first special figure and the second special figure, and output to the external information terminal Information for determining the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (For example, a flag related to fluctuation stoppage of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52) is set.

  53 and 54 show an example of the variation pattern table. When the result is out of order, basically, as shown in FIG. 53A, it is possible to select a variation pattern without reach or a variation pattern that reaches various reach states. Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the result is out of order and the effect state is the probability variation mode, only the variation pattern without reach is selected. When the result is a big hit, the reach state is always reached. Therefore, in the probability variation mode, the reach state is clearly informed that the big hit is made. However, in the probability variation mode, the second special figure variation display game is mainly executed because it is in the first operation state, but the reach state is also reached when the first special figure variation display game is executed and a small hit is made. Also, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), when the result is a special figure variation display game in which the number of times is set in the latent mode and the result is out of order, the variation time is 29.5 seconds with N reach as a special variation pattern. Only the variation pattern is selected. Since the stop time for displaying the result mode in this case is 0.5 seconds, the execution time is 30 seconds.

  When the result is a big hit as shown in FIG. 54, basically, a variation pattern other than reach is selected as shown in FIG. In the case of 2R big hit, only a fluctuation pattern with N reach and fluctuation time of 12 seconds is selected. Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), when the result is a big hit in the special-figure display game that is the specified number of times in the latent mode, only the SP reach is selected in the case of 15R big hit. Also, in the case of 2R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern with N reach and fluctuation time of 8.5 seconds is selected as a special fluctuation pattern. Since the stop time for displaying the result mode in this case is 1.0 second, the execution time is 9.5 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (c), when the result is a small hit, basically, a variation pattern having a variation time of 12 seconds with N reach is selected. This is the same variation pattern as 2R big hit. However, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), if the result is a special figure variation display game that is a specified number of times in the latent mode and the result is a small hit, the variation time is 8.5 seconds with N reach as the special variation pattern. Only the variation pattern is selected. Since the stop time for displaying the result mode in this case is 1.0 second, the execution time is 9.5 seconds.

  Note that the fluctuation pattern for 2R big hit is only a fluctuation pattern of 9.5 seconds with N reach, and the fluctuation pattern for small hit is 9.5 seconds with N reach regardless of the state. Only the fluctuation pattern may be used. Further, it is possible to select SP3 reach or the like having a low appearance frequency as a fluctuation pattern in the case of a small hit or 2R big hit at a specified number of times. In addition, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, which is the specified number of times, is set as a variation pattern without reach so that the variation of the special figure variation display game is not conspicuous, and the player performs in this special figure variation display game, which will be described later. You may make it pay attention to a common production.

  FIG. 55 shows the execution mode of the special figure variation display game that is the prescribed number of times in the latent mode. The special-figure display game in the case of a loss is displayed for 29.5 seconds and then stopped for 0.5 seconds, so the execution time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, since the fluctuation display is displayed for 8.5 seconds and then stopped for 1.0 second, the execution time becomes 9.5 seconds. After that, since the execution time of the special game state or the specific game state is 20.5 seconds, the time obtained by adding the execution time of the special figure change display game that becomes the 2R big hit or the small hit and the execution time of the special game state or the specific game state Is 30 seconds. That is, the execution time of the special figure variation display game in the case of a loss is the same as the execution time of the special game state or the specific game state added to the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game in the case of 2R big hit or small hit It's time.

  At this same time, as a common effect regarding whether or not the latent control mode is continued, the common control effect that the latent mode continues or a common end that the latent mode ends and the normal mode ends. Either the effect or the common transition effect indicating the transition to another mode (in this case, the probability variation mode) is executed. The common end effect is performed in the case of a special-figure display game with a result that is out of play, and in the case where the player is in the latent mode by making a small hit in the normal mode. The common transition effect is performed when the result is 2R probability variation. The common continuation effect is performed when it is in the latent mode due to the small hit in the normal mode, and the result is a small hit or 2R latent, or in the case of support during 2R or 2R latent This is a case where the mode has been reached and the result has been lost and the small hit is 2R support or 2R latency. Thus, by setting the execution time of the special figure variation display game so that common effect data can be used in a plurality of cases, it is possible to reduce the effect data that needs to be stored.

  In addition, even if the game is in the latent mode due to the small hit in the normal mode, if the result of the special figure variation display game at the specified number of times becomes the small hit again, the special number of the specified number of times is further increased. The hidden mode is set until the variable display game is executed. In this case, since the common continuation effect is performed, the case where the latent mode is determined to continue from the beginning (in the case of a high probability state) and the case where the latent mode continues due to the occurrence of another small hit (the normal probability state) In the case of (1)) can be made difficult, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, if the game is in the latent mode due to the small hit in the normal mode, and the result of the special figure variation display game that is the specified number of times becomes 2R latent or support during 2R, the common continuous performance is also performed. Since the latent mode is continued (in this case, a high probability state is established), it becomes more difficult to determine the probability state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the small hit flag setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A541), and the RWM small hit flag is displayed. The area is cleared (step A542). Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A543), and the process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 2 area (step A544) is performed. Then, it is checked whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A545). If it is determined that the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A546; Yes), processing for clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area (step A552) is performed. Next, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A553), and a process of setting the round number upper limit table (step) A554) is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A546 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A546; No), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. (Step A547), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area (Step A548) is performed. Subsequently, the loaded jackpot flag 1 is checked (step A549), and if it is determined that the jackpot is hit (step A550; Yes), a test related to the start of the jackpot (special chart 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game. The signal is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A551), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A554) is performed.

  After the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A554), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A555). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A556).

  Next, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A557), and command setting processing is performed. (Step A558) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol pattern number) set in the stop symbol information setting process is prepared (step A559), and the command setting process (step A560) is performed. After that, a special symbol command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol pattern information) relating to the special symbol variation display game is loaded and prepared from the RWM special symbol command area (step A561), and command setting processing (step A562) is performed. )I do.

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special prize opening information is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A563), and it corresponds to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the normal map variable display game and the special map variable display game. The signal to be saved is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A564). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step A565), and the big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer (step A566). Then, after resetting the number of illegal winnings to the special winning opening (step A567), the illegal winning period illegal monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag (step A568).

  Then, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A569) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. In this process, a process number “3” related to the fanfare / interval process, a process of setting information related to switching of various states, and the like are performed. Here, as information for switching the various states, for example, a signal indicating that the game state for output is a special game state (big hit state), a universal map display game, and a special map display game on the external information terminal A test signal indicating that the probability of winning a hit result is a normal probability state (low probability state), information related to clearing the number of winnings in the big winning mouth during the illegal winning mouth fraud monitoring period, the number of rounds in the special gaming state Information related to clearing, information about turning off the game state display LED (error indicator) related to display of high probability state, and probability of hitting result in a general-purpose variable display game as a normal probability state (low probability state) Information, information for turning off the game state display LED (error indicator) relating to the display of the high probability state that was turned on at the time of power failure recovery, information for controlling the special figure fluctuation display game (for example, special figure fluctuation display game) Information that sets the probability of hitting results in the normal probability state (low probability state), and the hit results in the normal figure fluctuation display game and special figure fluctuation display game that are output to the production control device 300 when the power failure is restored For example, information indicating that the probability is a normal probability state (low probability state, information on clearing the number of remaining time reduction fluctuations after a big hit), and the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A550 that the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A550; No) as a result of the check, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether there is a specific variation flag (step A570). The specific variation flag is a flag that is set when 2R big hit or small hit is entered and the mode is changed to the latent mode (including the case where the latent mode is set again). If there is no specific variation flag (step A570; No), it is determined whether there is a prefetch prohibition flag (step A575).

  If there is a specific fluctuation flag (step A570; Yes), the specific fluctuation count is updated by -1 (step A571), and it is determined whether the specific fluctuation count is 1 (step A572). The specific variation number is set as an initial value at a predetermined number (here, 10) at the end of the special gaming state based on the derivation of a predetermined special result mode, as will be described later. If the specific fluctuation count is not 1 (step A572), it is determined whether there is a prefetch prohibition flag (step A574). When the specific variation number is 1 (step A572; Yes), that is, when the next special figure variation display game is the specified number of special figure variation display game, the specific variation flag is cleared (step A573) The fluctuation switching flag is set (step A574), and it is determined whether there is a prefetch prohibition flag (step A575). By setting this specific fluctuation switching flag, the fluctuation pattern of the next special figure fluctuation display game becomes a special fluctuation pattern.

  The pre-reading prohibition flag is a 2R big hit or small hit and after the transition to the latent mode (including the case where the latent mode is set again), until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here 10 times). This is a flag to be set. During the period in which this flag is set, the pre-reading effect for the first start memory is prohibited. The operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 in the latent modes A and B is a state in which only the normal probability is different, and it is difficult to understand which state it is. However, in the latent mode A, since it is a normal operation state, a pre-reading effect for the first start memory is possible, but in the latent mode B, a pre-reading effect for the first start memory is possible because it is in the second operation state (short time state). Can not do. For this reason, if the pre-reading effect for the first start-up memory is performed, it will be understood that the mode is the latent mode A. Therefore, the pre-reading effect is prohibited until the specified number of times, and it is determined whether the latent mode is A or B. I am trying not to.

  If there is no prefetch prohibition flag (step A575; No), it is determined whether or not the time is short (during the time short state) (step A579). If there is a prefetch prohibition flag (step A575; Yes), the prefetch prohibition count is updated by -1 (step A576), and it is determined whether the prefetch prohibition count is 0 (step A577). Note that the number of prefetching prohibitions is set as an initial value for the number of executions of the special figure variable display game that prohibits the prefetching effect at the end of the special gaming state based on the derivation of a predetermined special result mode, as will be described later. The If the prefetch prohibition count is not 0 (step A577; No), that is, if the prefetch effect is prohibited even in the next special figure variation display game, it is determined whether or not the time is short (step A579). When the prefetch prohibition count is 0 (step A577; Yes), that is, when the period during which the prefetch effect is prohibited in this special figure variation display game ends, the prefetch prohibition flag is cleared (step A578), It is determined whether the time is short or not (step A579).

  If it is determined that the time is short (in the time short state) (step A579) and the time is not short (step A579; No), it is checked whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A583). If the time is short (step A579; Yes), the time shortening variation count is updated by -1 (step A580), and it is determined whether the time shortening variation count is 0 (step A581). The time shortening variation number is for managing the number of special figure variation display games to be in the short time state, and is usually at the end of the special gaming state based on the derivation of a predetermined special result mode (15R normal) as will be described later. The number of executions (in this case, 70) of the special figure variable display game in which the operation state of the variable winning device 37 is the short-time operation state is set as an initial value. If the time shortening variation count is not 0 (step A581; No), that is, if the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, it is checked whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A583). If the time shortening variation count is 0 (step A581; Yes), that is, if the time saving state is terminated in this special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation count area is reset (step A582), It is checked whether the flag is a small hit (step A583). As a result, the time reduction state is terminated and the normal operation state is obtained.

  It is checked whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A583), and if it is a small hit (step A584; Yes), a fanfare command is prepared (step A585) and command setting processing is performed (step A586). Next, a special command command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol pattern information) related to the special symbol variation display game is prepared by loading the command from the special symbol command area of the RWM (step A587). (Step A588). These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, a small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is performed (step A589), and the special figure display mid-process is terminated. In the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process (step A589), a process number “7” related to the small hitting fanfare process is set, and information related to switching of various states is set.

  On the other hand, when it is not a small hit (step A584; No), that is, when it is out of place, the stay mode information based on the state determination flag is set (step A590), and a probability information command corresponding to the state determination flag is prepared ( Step A591), command setting processing is performed (step A592). This command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. The state determination flag is set based on the type of the most recent special result, and thereby the production state is set based on the type of the most recent special result. It should be noted that the normal mode is in the latent mode, and the special number fluctuation display game (out of the result) of the specified number of times is finished, or the special number fluctuation display game (out of the result) of the predetermined number of times (70 times) is finished in the short time mode. In such a case, information indicating the transition to the normal mode is set, and the effect control device 300 sets the effect state to the normal mode based on this information. Thereafter, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A593) is performed, and the special figure display in-process is terminated. In the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A593), a process for setting the processing number “0” relating to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize fraud monitoring information) for defining the special prize fraud monitoring period, and the like are performed. .

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the jackpot ending process, first, a state determination flag set based on the type of special result mode that triggered the execution of the current special gaming state is loaded (step A601). Branch processing (step A602) is performed.

  When the state determination flag is 1, jackpot end setting processing 1 (step A603) is performed. In this case, the special result mode is 2R sudden probability and 15R probability change, and the high probability state is set after the special game state is ended, and the first operation state is set until the next special result mode is derived. On the other hand, when the state determination flag is 2, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A604) is performed. In this case, when the special result mode is 15R normal, the normal probability state is set after the special game state is ended, and the first operation state is executed until the special figure variation display game is executed 70 times after the special game state is ended. This is the case.

  On the other hand, when the state determination flag is 3, jackpot end setting processing 3 (step A605) is performed. In this case, the special result mode is support during 2R, and the high probability state is set after the special game state is ended, and the second operation state is set until the next special result mode is derived. On the other hand, when the state determination flag is 4, the jackpot end setting process 4 (step A606) is performed. In this case, the special result mode is 2R latency, and after the special gaming state is finished, the state becomes a high probability state and becomes a normal operation state.

  After performing one of the big hit end setting processes 1 to 4, the stay mode information based on the state determination flag is set (step A607), and a probability information command corresponding to the state determination flag is prepared (step A608). A setting process (step A609) is performed. The stay mode information and the probability information command are transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 sets the effect state based on this information. And a special figure usual process transfer setting process is performed (step A610), and the big hit end process is complete | finished. In the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A610), a process for setting the processing number “0” relating to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize fraud monitoring information) defining the special prize mouth fraud monitoring period, and the like are performed. .

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 59 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A603) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start at the high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A611), and a signal related to the start at the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A612). ).

  Next, the high probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A613), and the common figure high probability and the ordinary power support flag are saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A614). Then, the high probability and short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A615), and the probability information command (with high probability support) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A616). Thereafter, the time shortening variation count area is reset (step A617), the specific variation count area is reset (step A618), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. With the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the first operation state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A604) in the above jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A621), and a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A622).

  Next, the number of the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A623), and the common figure high probability and the ordinary power support flag are saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step A624). Then, the low probability and short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A625), and the probability information command (with low probability support) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A626). Thereafter, the initial value (70) of the time shortening variation number is saved in the time shortening variation number region (step A627), the specific variation number region is reset (step A628), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

  With the above processing, after the special gaming state is finished, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the first operation state. Also, by setting the time shortening variation count initial value (70) in the time shortening variation count area, the time shortening state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (70 times).

[Big jackpot end setting 3]
FIG. 61 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A605) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to the start at the high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A631), and a signal related to the start at the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A632). ).

  Next, the number at the time of high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A633), and the high figure probability and the normal power support flag are saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A634). Then, the high probability and medium support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A635), and the probability information command (high probability medium support) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A636). Thereafter, the time shortening variation count area is reset (step A637), and the specific variation flag is set (step A638). Then, the specific variation count initial value (10) is saved in the specific variation count area (step A639), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated. By the above processing, after the special game state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the second operation state. Furthermore, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game of the specified number of times (tenth) becomes the special variation pattern.

[Big hit end setting process 4]
FIG. 62 shows the big hit end setting process 4 (step A606) in the big hit end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 4, first, a signal related to the start at the high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A641), and a signal related to the start at the high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A642). ).

  Next, the high probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A643), and the common figure high probability and no power support flag is saved in the usual game mode flag area (step A644). Then, a high probability and short time flag is saved in the special game mode flag area (step A645), and a probability information command (no high probability support) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A646). Thereafter, the time shortening variation count area is reset (step A647), the specific variation flag is set (step A648), and the specific variation count initial value (10) is saved in the specific variation count area (step A649). Further, the prefetch prohibition flag is set (step A650), the prefetch prohibition count initial value (10) is saved in the prefetch prohibition count area (step A651), and the big hit end setting process 4 is terminated. With the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the normal operation state. Further, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game for the specified number of times (10th) becomes a special variation pattern, and the pre-reading effect on the first start memory is prohibited until the special number variation display game for the specified number of times (10 times) is executed. Will be.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step A19) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the small hit end process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the specific small hit (step A661). The specific small hit is a small hit generated in the normal mode or the latent mode. If it is not at the end of the specific small hit (step A661; No), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A670), and the small hit end process is ended. If it is at the end of the specific small hit (step A661; Yes), it is determined whether there is a specific variation flag (step A662).

  If there is a specific variation flag (step A662; Yes), that is, if it is a small hit that occurs before the specified number of times since the start of the latent mode, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A670). ), The small hit end processing is ended. In this case, the transition of the production state and the setting of the initial value of the specific fluctuation count for counting the specified number of times are not performed. If there is no specific fluctuation flag (step A662; No), the specific fluctuation flag is set (step A663), and the initial value (10) of the specific fluctuation count is saved in the specific fluctuation count area (step A664).

  Thereafter, the stay mode information based on the state determination flag set corresponding to the occurrence of the small hit is set (step A665), the probability information command corresponding to the state determination flag is prepared (step A666), and the command setting process (Step A667). As a result, the transitional production state is set. In addition, information on the effect state to be transferred to the effect control device 300 is also transmitted by the probability information command.

  Then, the prefetch prohibition flag is set (step A668), and the prefetch prohibition count initial value (10) is saved in the prefetch prohibition count area (step A669). This process prohibits the pre-reading process for the first start memory for a certain period of time (here, the period for executing the special figure variation display game 10 times) after the end of the small hit that occurred in the normal mode or the latent mode. It becomes difficult to determine whether the hit is a small hit or 2R big hit, and the interest in the latent mode can be enhanced. When a small hit occurs in a mode other than the normal mode, the prefetch prohibition flag may not be set. Thereafter, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A670), and the small hit end process is terminated.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
FIG. 64 shows special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A668) in the above-described small hit end process. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, “0” of the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A671), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A672). Next, a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A673), and a signal related to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A674). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A675).

  Then, the round LED pointer area is reset (step A676), the probability information command (specific low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A677), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

  FIG. 65 shows the probability information command saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery when the above-mentioned big hit end processing, small hit end processing and effect state change. When the performance state shifts to the normal mode, the low probability information is set. Also, high probability information and variable time shortening operation time information 1 (with high probability support) is set when shifting to probability variation mode, and low probability information and variable time shortening operation (low probability) when transitioning to short time mode. Is set). Further, when shifting to the latent mode A, high-probability time information (without high-probability support) is set, and when shifting to the latent mode B, high-probability time information and variable time shortening operation time information 2 (high-probability medium) Support) is set. When a small hit occurs in the normal mode and the mode shifts to the latent mode A, low probability information (small hit, specific low probability) is set. If a small hit occurs in a mode other than the normal mode, a probability information command that maintains the effect state at the time of occurrence is selected.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, at the time of restoration from a power failure, a command for instructing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game until the change of the effect state is transmitted simultaneously with the above-described command (step S23 in FIG. 39). For example, a command corresponding to the number of remaining games in the short-time mode and the number of remaining games from the latent mode until the specified number of games is transmitted. Thereby, the state before a power failure can be continuously performed after a power failure is restored.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. As described above, the presentation control device 300 includes the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 that performs video control under the control of the main control microcomputer 311.

[1st main processing]
The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 performs the 1st main process shown in FIG. In this 1st main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. As processing at the time of starting the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step B11), the RAM is cleared to 0 (step B12), and a CPU initialization process (step B13) for initializing the CPU is performed. Next, an initial value of the RAM is set (step B14), random number initialization processing (step B15) for initializing random numbers is performed, timers for various interrupts are started (step B16), and interrupts are permitted (step B16). B17).

  Next, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop process, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step B18), and an effect button input process (step B19) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. . Thereafter, a game control command analysis process (step B20) is performed. In this game control command analysis process (step B20), it is determined whether or not a command related to a game transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 has been correctly received. Processing to classify commands for processing.

  Next, a test mode process (step B21), which is a process related to a test mode for testing the display device 41, the decoration device, the rendering device, and the like, is performed. When the test mode is set by the test mode process (step B21), the subsequent game-related processes are not performed. However, in the test mode, when performing display on the display device 41, output of sound from the speaker, light emission of the LED of the decoration device, operation of the effect device, etc., control is performed in a process for controlling these. Note that the test mode ends when the gaming machine is powered off.

  And the 1st scene control process (step B22) regarding control of the effect of a game is performed. Details of the 1st scene control process (step B22) will be described later. Next, based on an error notification command transmitted from the gaming control device 100 when an error occurs in the gaming machine, a gaming machine error monitoring process (step B23) for performing a corresponding notification is performed. In addition, the display on the display device 41 for performing the corresponding notification, the sound output from the speaker, the light emission of the LED of the decoration device, the operation of the effect device, and the like are controlled in a process for controlling these.

  Thereafter, an effect command editing process (step B24) for editing a command to be output to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 is performed, and a sound control process for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b). (Step B25) is performed. Next, a decoration control process for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 18 (step B26), a motor / SOL control process for controlling the motors and solenoids of the panel effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 (step) B27) is performed. And the random number update process (step B28) which updates the random number which determines the detail of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and it returns to the process (step B18) which clears WDT.

[2nd main processing]
The video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 performs a 2nd main process shown in FIG. In the 2nd main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. As processing at the start of the program, first, CPU initialization processing for initializing the CPU (step B31) is performed, the RAM is cleared to 0 (step B32), and the initial value of the RAM is set (step B33). Next, VDP initialization processing (step B34) for initializing VDP is performed, and various interrupts are permitted (step B35). Further, initialization processing of various control devices (step B36) is performed, and screen drawing is permitted (step B37).

  Next, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the system cycle wait flag is cleared (step B38), and it is determined whether or not the system cycle wait flag is 1 (step B39). The system cycle is a cycle for switching between two buffers for temporarily storing image data. When the switching is enabled, the system cycle flag is “1”. Until the system cycle wait flag becomes 1, the determination whether the system cycle wait flag is 1 is repeated (step B39). When the system cycle wait flag becomes 1 (step B39; Yes), WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step B40), the normal game process (step B41) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the system cycle waiting flag (step B38).

[Normal game processing]
FIG. 68 shows the normal game process (step B41) in the 2nd main process shown in FIG. In this normal game process, first, a received command check process (step B51) is performed. In this received command check process (step B51), it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the 1st CPU has been correctly received. If the command has been correctly received, the command is determined and a command for a 2nd scene control process to be described later. Process to classify. Next, 2nd scene control processing (step B52) for determining display contents is performed based on the received command. In this 2nd scene control process (step B52), settings such as a notice character and a display priority are set.

  Thereafter, a background process (step B53) for setting a background is performed, and a reel control / display process (step B54), which is a display control process related to the variation of the identification information in the decoration special figure variation display game, is performed. Further, a hold display process (step B55) for setting the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 in conjunction with the display of the special figure 1 hold indicator and the special figure 2 hold indicator is performed, and the customer waits. A customer waiting demonstration process (step B56) regarding the display of the demonstration is performed. Then, the ROM data is transferred to the buffer set in the RAM, the display system process (step B57) for performing the actual display process is performed, and the normal game process is terminated.

[1st scene control processing]
FIG. 69 shows the 1st scene control process (step B22) in the 1st main process shown in FIG. In this 1st scene control process, first, it is determined whether or not the test mode is in effect (step B61). If the test mode is in effect (step B61; Yes), the 1st scene control process is terminated. When the test mode is not being executed (step B61; No), it is determined whether a scene change command has been received (step B62).

  The scene change commands are various commands relating to games transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. If this scene change command is received (step B62; Yes), the game state to be updated (current game state) is acquired (step B63), and it is determined whether the command is a valid command (step B64). In determining whether the command is valid (step B64), it is determined whether the received scene change command is valid for the acquired current game state. If the command is valid (step B64; Yes), the received command is saved (step B65), an effect request flag is set (step B66), and a branch process based on the command identifier of the received command (step B67). )I do.

  On the other hand, when the scene change command has not been received (step B62; No) or when it is not a valid command (step B64; No), branch processing (step B67) based on the command identifier of the received command is performed. In this case, a branch is performed based on the identifier of the command that was most recently valid.

  In the branch process based on the command identifier (step B67), a process to be executed based on the received command is selected. When a power-on command is received, a power-on process (step B68) is performed to perform a process necessary when the power is turned on. Further, when a power failure recovery command is received, a power failure recovery (other than customer waiting) processing (step B69) for performing processing necessary at the time of power failure recovery is performed. When a customer waiting demo command is received, a customer waiting process (step B70) for performing processing related to display of the customer waiting demo is performed.

  In addition, when a variation pattern command is received, a variation processing (step B71) for performing processing related to the execution of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed. In the process during change (step B71), information necessary for playing the decoration special figure change display game is set. In the setting of information necessary for playing this decoration special figure variation display game, for example, information included in the variation pattern command transmitted from the game control device 100 (whether it is a big hit, mode information, variation pattern information, etc.) Based on this, the production (variation pattern, variation time, etc.) is set. Further, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game is ended, the variation display of the identification information in the decoration special figure variation display game is stopped, the stop display time is set, and the like.

  When a fanfare command is received, a fanfare process (step B72), which is a process related to the start of the special game state or the specific game state, is performed. In addition, when the large entry / release n-th command is received, an in-round process (step B73), which is a process related to a round game, is performed. When an interval command is received, an interval process (step B74) that is a process related to an interval between rounds is performed. When an ending command is received, an ending process (step B75), which is a process related to the end of the special game state or the specific game state, is performed.

  After performing each of the above-described processes selected by the branch process based on the command identifier (step B67), a process based on a command that is not immediately reflected in the video is performed. As this process, first, a symbol command reception process (step B76) for performing a process based on a decoration special symbol command including information related to a stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game is performed, and a pending number command including information regarding increase / decrease of the start memory ( A hold number command reception process (step B77) is performed for performing processing based on the special figure 1 hold number command and the special figure 2 hold number command.

  Further, a prefetch command (start opening prize effect command, winning effect symbol command) including a result of a prefetching process for determining the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory in advance before the execution of the special figure variation display game is used. A prefetch command reception process (step B78) for performing a process based on the above is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command reception process (step B79) is performed for performing a process based on a probability information command including information on the probability state.

[Fluctuation processing]
FIG. 70 shows the changing process (step B71) in the first scene control process shown in FIG. In this changing process, it is first determined whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B91). The effect request flag is a flag that is set when a valid command is received. When this flag is present, processing based on the received command is performed.

  When there is this effect request flag (step B91; Yes), PB information that is information related to the input of the effect button 25 is cleared (step B92), and a movable body request set process (step B93) is performed. Next, a variation number management process (step B94) for managing various periods by the effect control device 300 is performed, and a variation pattern information setting process (step B95) for setting the execution mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed. Then, random number seed initialization processing (step B96) is performed, and a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern is set (step B97).

  The scene sequence table is a table for managing the execution timing and time of various displays such as the start and stop of the variable display and the display of the effect character in the decoration special figure variable display game. In the scene sequence table, the execution order of a plurality of scenes in which execution contents and time are defined is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed by sequentially executing the scenes according to the scene sequence table. The effect state (effect mode) is also set in the scene sequence table based on information transmitted from the game control device 100. However, the effect control device 300 may determine and set the effect state independently. Thereafter, a variation time setting process (step B98) for setting a variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, the effect request flag is cleared (step B99), and the variation process is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is no production request flag (step B91; No), it is determined whether the value of the update timer is 0 (step B100). In this case, the update timer measures the execution time of the scene managed according to the scene sequence table, and the value of this update timer being 0 indicates that the scene being executed has ended. When the value of the update timer is not 0 (step B100; No), the changing process is terminated. When the value of the update timer is 0 (step B100; Yes), the scene data setting process (step B101) is performed and the changing process is terminated. As a result, a new scene is started and a predetermined value corresponding to the scene is set in the update timer.

[Variation frequency management process]
FIG. 71 shows the change frequency management process (step B94) in the changing process shown in FIG. In this variation number management process, first, it is checked whether there is a time reduction flag (step B110). The time reduction flag is a flag that is set when the time reduction state is set. If there is no short flag at this time (step B112; No), it is checked whether there is a specific effect flag (step B116). If there is a time reduction flag (step B112; Yes), the time change variation count is updated by -1 (step B113), and it is determined whether the time reduction change count is 0 (step B114).

  The number of short-time fluctuations is for managing the number of special figure variation display games to be in the short-time state, and normally changes at the end of the special game state based on the derivation of a predetermined special result mode (15R normal) as will be described later. The number of executions (70 in this case) of the special figure variation display game in which the operation state of the winning device 37 is the short-time operation state is set as an initial value. If the time-saving state continues until the next special result mode is derived, 0 is set as the initial value. If the number of short fluctuations is not 0 at this time (step B114; No), that is, if the short time state continues in the next special figure fluctuation display game, it is checked whether there is a specific effect flag (step B116). If the number of hourly fluctuations is 0 (step B114; Yes), that is, if the hourly state ends in this special figure fluctuation display game, the hourly flag is cleared (step B115) and there is a specific effect flag. Is checked (step B116).

  The specific effect flag is from 2R big hit or small hit to shift to the latent mode (including the case where the latent mode is set again) and before executing the special figure variation display game for the specified number of times (here 10 times). The flag to be set. When there is no specific effect flag (step B117; No), the variation number management process is terminated. If there is a specific effect flag (step B117; Yes), the specific effect change count is updated by -1 (step B118), and it is determined whether the specific effect change count is 0 (step B119).

  As will be described later, the specific effect variation number is set to a predetermined number (here, 10) as an initial value at the end of the special gaming state based on the derivation of a predetermined special result mode. Is not 0 (step B119; No), that is, when the specified number of times has not been reached, the variation number management process is terminated. If the specific effect variation number is 0 (step B119; Yes), that is, if the current special figure variation display game is the special number variation display game of the specified number of times, the special effect variation flag is set ( In step B120), the specific effect flag is cleared (step B121), and the variation number management process is terminated. With this variation count management process, it is possible to manage the period of time reduction in the performance control device 300 and the execution of the common performance in the special figure variation display game with the specified number of times, and it is possible to perform effects according to the gaming state. .

[Variation pattern information setting process]
FIG. 72 shows the change pattern information setting process (step B95) in the changing process shown in FIG. In this variation pattern information setting process, first, stop symbol information of the special diagram variation display game is acquired (step B131), and on-hold information that is information relating to the start memory is saved (step B132). Next, the game state including the stay mode information (including the stay mode (effect state), the probability state, the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37, etc.) is acquired (step B133) and stored in the start storage area. Production information is acquired (step B134). The effect information is information that is set for the start-up memory that is the target of the continuous effect when the prefetch effect that is a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) based on the pre-read information is executed.

  Thereafter, a stop symbol of the decoration special figure change display game is set (step B135), and it is checked whether or not there is a special effect change flag (step B136). And when there is no special effect change flag (step B137; No), the change pattern corresponding to a command is determined based on a game state and effect information (step B144), and a change pattern information setting process is complete | finished. If there is a special effect fluctuation flag (step B137; Yes), it is checked whether or not the target is a special effect target (step B138).

  When the target is a special effect (step B139; Yes), the corresponding special variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern (step B140), and the variation pattern information setting process is terminated. If the target is not a special effect (step B139; No), a variation pattern corresponding to the command is determined based on the gaming state and the effect information (step B141), and the variation pattern information setting process is terminated.

  The case where it is not a target of special effects is a case where the result is a 15R big hit, and a special variation pattern is set by the game control device 100 except for this case. Therefore, in the production control device 300, a special variation pattern for performing a common continuation effect indicating that the latent mode is continued, a common transition effect indicating that the mode is shifted to the probability variation mode, or a common end effect indicating that the latent mode is ended is generated in accordance with this. Set. The content of the common continuation effect, common end effect, and common transition effect may be anything, but the same effect will be made until the end of the effect, and the continuation, end of the latent mode, and transition to the probability change mode will be made at the end of the effect. If the effect is to be informed, an expectation can be given to the end of the special figure variation display game, and the interest is improved.

[Ending process]
FIG. 73 shows the ending process (step B75) in the first scene control process shown in FIG. In this ending process, it is first determined whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B151). If there is an effect request flag (step B151; Yes), it is determined whether the ending is for a specific game state based on the small hit. Determination is made (step B152).

  When it is not the ending of the specific gaming state based on the small hit (step B152; No), the big hit ending is set (step B153), the probability information based on the probability information command and the stay mode information are acquired (step B154), and the stay A mode state to be shifted is set based on the mode information (step B155). Thereby, any one of the production states (modes) shown in FIG. 7 is set. And the information regarding the mode information to transfer is acquired (step B156), and it is determined whether the set mode is a latent mode (step B157).

  If the set mode is not the latent mode (step B157; No), the corresponding variation pattern table is set (step B160). If the set mode is the latent mode (step B157; Yes), the specific effect flag is set (step B158), the specific effect change count (10) is set (step B159), and the corresponding change is made. A pattern table is set (step B160).

  Thereafter, information on the jackpot is acquired based on the probability information (step B161), and it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot with a short time (step B162). If there is a short time and not a big hit (step B162; No), that is, if it is 2R latency, the effect request flag is cleared (step B165), and the ending process is terminated. Further, when the time is short and big hit (step B162; Yes), that is, when it is other than the 2R latency, the time reduction flag is set (step B163), and the number of time reduction fluctuations is set (step B164). The number of short-time fluctuations is set to 70 when the special result is 15 normal. Also, if the special result is 15R probability change, 2R accuracy, or support during 2R and the time is short until the next special result is derived, 0 is set. Then, the effect request flag is cleared (step B165), and the ending process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no production request flag (step B151; No), it is determined whether the update timer is 0 (step B167). In this case, the update timer measures the ending time at the end of the special gaming state, and a value of 0 for this update timer indicates that the ending time has elapsed. If the value of this update timer is not 0 (step B167; No), the ending process is terminated. If the value of the update timer is 0 (step B167; Yes), end ending is set (step B168), and the ending process is ended.

  If the ending is in a specific gaming state based on the small hit (step B152; Yes), the small hit ending process is performed (step B166), the effect request flag is cleared (step B165), and the ending process ends. To do.

[Ending process for small hits]
FIG. 74 shows the small hitting ending process (step B166) in the ending process shown in FIG. In this small hitting ending process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the end of a specific small hit (step B171). The specific small hit is a small hit generated in the normal mode or the latent mode. If it is not at the end of the specific small hit (step B171; No), the small hit end ending process is ended. If it is at the end of the specific small hit (step B171; Yes), it is checked whether there is a specific effect flag (step B172).

  If there is a specific effect flag (step B173; Yes), the small hitting ending process is terminated. If there is no specific effect flag (step B173; No), the specific effect flag is set (step B174), and the specific effect change count (10) is set (step B175). Thereafter, the probability information and the stay mode information based on the probability information command are acquired (step B176), and the mode state to be shifted based on the stay mode information is set (step B177). Then, the corresponding variation pattern table is set (step B178), and the small hitting ending process is terminated.

  With the above processing, the special result type is selected according to the gaming state as shown in FIG. 6, and the transition of the effect state as shown in FIG. 7 is performed. Also, in the special figure variation display game of the specified number of times after entering the latent mode, a common performance time is secured in the case of 2R big hit and small hit, and the production using the common production data can be executed.

  In addition, when the number of games in the latent mode exceeds a predetermined number, it may be possible to prevent the player from getting bored by performing a specific performance or increasing the reliability of the pre-reading performance. . In addition, the pre-reading effect during the period from when the latent mode is entered until the specified number of special figure change display games are executed is prohibited, but the pre-reading effect may be performed.

  Moreover, although the presentation state is shifted by occurrence of a big hit or a small hit, the presentation state may be shifted under other conditions. Further, the effect control device 300 may arbitrarily change the effect state based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of start memories and the occurrence of a predetermined number of small hits without using information from the game control device 100. . In addition, a game for mode transition is performed, and a mode for transition is set by the effect control device 300 based on an operation input (the presence / absence of input or an operation mode) from the player by the effect button 25 in the game. Also good. In this case, the effect state in the game control device 100 and the effect state in the effect control device 300 are different, and the variation time set by the game control device 100 and the variation pattern that can be set by the effect control device 300 are variable. If there is a difference, a dedicated effect is made to compensate for the difference in the variation time.

[First Modification of First Embodiment]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine according to the present modification selects a mode to shift based on the prefetch result.

[Ending process for small hits]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the small hitting ending process shown in FIG. 75 is performed instead of the small hitting ending process shown in FIG. In this small hitting ending process, first, information of the start memory area is acquired (step B181), and it is checked whether there is a start memory that becomes 2R big hit (step B182). If there is no 2R big hit (step B183; No), the following processing is performed (step B171) for determining whether or not the specific small hit is over. If there is a 2R big hit (step B183; Yes), the normal mode state is set (step B184), the corresponding variation pattern table is set (step B178), and the small hit ending process is terminated.

  With this process, if the occurrence of a small hit in the state where there is a start memory that becomes a 2R big hit is a special figure variation display game for the specified number of times in the latent mode, the normal mode is set in this small hit ending process. . Further, in this case, a common end effect that the latent mode ends is performed. As a result, 2R jackpot can be generated after giving the player a feeling of discouragement, and a very high sense of achievement can be given to enhance the interest. In addition, if it is not the special figure variation display game of the specified number of times in the latent mode, it will not switch to the latent mode after the occurrence of the small hit, or the original production mode is not maintained, it will become the normal mode, so this It is possible to recognize the occurrence of the subsequent 2R jackpot at the time, and it is possible to make a jackpot notice by breaking the law of mode transition. In addition, when the type of 2R big hit is 2R probability change, it may be possible to shift to probability change mode after the end of the specific gaming state.

[Second Modification of First Embodiment]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The game machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of the special variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in this modification, the variation time is 8.5 seconds when the result is a special figure variation display game that is a specified number of times in the latent mode, and the result is out of order. The stop time to be displayed is 21.5 seconds, and the execution time is 30 seconds. This variation time is the same variation time as the variation time in the case of a special-figure variation display game that is a specified number of times in the latent mode and the result is a big hit. By doing in this way, the stop timing of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 can also be made into the same timing, and it can prevent that a result is understood by the difference in the variation time here.

  In order to perform such control, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern) in the case of the special figure fluctuation display game that is the specified number of times in the latent mode shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern with a time of 8.5 seconds is assumed. Also, in the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 52, a special figure display time of 21.5 seconds is shown as a special figure display time when the result is a special figure change display game that is a specified number of times in the latent mode. To select.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described.

  The gaming machine of this embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the first embodiment in the selection ratio and effect state of special results. FIG. 77 shows the selection ratio of special results, and FIG. 78 shows the types of effects and transition conditions. In particular, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the 2R latency selection ratio is in the high probability state and the first operation state (high support), or in the high probability state and the second operation state (medium support). It is higher in the case of the high probability state and the normal operation state (without support). Therefore, there is a high possibility that 2R latency occurs again after 2R latency occurs. In the case of the high probability state and the first operation state (high support), or the high probability state and the second operation state (medium support), the 2R latency is not selected. In the second special figure variation display game, only the special result that is in the first operation state is selected. That is, also in this embodiment, after the end of the special gaming state, the special figure variation display is next performed based on the probability state set by the probability setting unit and the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 set by the operation state selection unit. When the game result is a special result, the selection ratio of the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 is different.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, in the effect state of the present embodiment, the effect state that was the latent mode A in the first embodiment is set as the latent mode, and the effect state that was the latent mode B is set as the chance mode. This latent mode and chance mode can be clearly distinguished by the player.

  Although the latent mode is a high-probability state but not a short-time state, the amount of game balls consumed is large, and since the selection ratio of 2R latent is high, there is a high possibility that even if a special result is obtained, the latent mode is set again. In other words, when the latent mode is entered, the player continues the game in a disadvantageous state. However, since all 2R jackpots are in a high probability state, a jackpot that can eventually win a ball occurs. On the other hand, since the chance mode is the second operation state, the amount of game balls consumed is smaller than in the latent mode, and 2R latent is not selected and there is a high probability that 2R accuracy is selected. Therefore, in the chance mode, it is close to the chance to move to the probability variation mode and acquire a ball, and more chances can be obtained by looping the probability variation mode, so that the game can be played in a state advantageous to the player. Can continue. In the chance mode, there is a possibility of selecting support during 2R, but in this case, the chance mode is entered again, so that the game can be continued in an advantageous state for the player.

  In this way, as the production state after the end of the special game state, the production state is selected according to the operation state of the second start winning opening selected based on the special result that triggered the occurrence of the special game state. The player can know the selection ratio of the type of special result to be generated next according to the production state, and can know whether the game state is advantageous or unfavorable for the player. Can be improved. And even if it is a high probability state, in the normal operation state where the amount of game balls consumed is large, there is a high possibility that the normal operation state will be resumed even if a special result is derived. If the first or second operation state is smaller than the operation state, there is a high possibility that the first or second operation state is reached again. Therefore, even in the same high probability state, there is a high possibility that the disadvantageous state continues for the player, but the advantageous state is also likely to continue, and the difference between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state is large and innovative. The game can be executed and the interest of the player can be enhanced. In addition, even in the normal operation state where the amount of game balls consumed is high, the game is continued if the probability is high, so that the balance between the profits of the game store and the player can be maintained.

  In addition, when a small hit is made in the normal mode, the mode is shifted to the chance mode. In this case, the normal mode is restored by playing the special-figure display game of the specified number of times (10 times). Yes. In order to perform this effect, in the special figure variation display game of the specified number of times (10th time) after shifting to the chance mode (including the case of the chance mode again) after 2R support or small hits, A special variation pattern is selected as in the embodiment.

  In the special figure variation display game in which the special variation pattern is selected, the production control device 300 is a common production of whether or not the chance mode is continued as a common production regarding whether or not the chance mode is continued, or the chance mode is ended. Either a common end effect for returning to the normal mode or a common transfer effect for shifting to the probability change mode or the latent mode is executed. The common end effect is performed in the case of a special figure variation display game with a result that is out of the game, and in the case where the chance mode is entered due to the small hit in the normal mode. The common transition effect is performed when the result is 2R probability change or 2R latency (only in the case of a normal probability state). The common continuation effect is performed in the case of the chance mode due to the small hit in the normal mode and the result becomes the small hit or 2R support, or the chance mode is triggered by the support in 2R. This is a case where the result is out of order and the result is a small hit or 2R support. As described above, by setting the execution time of the special figure variation display game so that the common effect data can be used in a plurality of cases, the effect data that needs to be stored can be reduced.

  FIG. 79 shows an example of the common continuation effect, the common end effect, and the common transition effect. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), when the special-number variation display game for the specified number of times is started, the level meter M is displayed at the right end portion of the display area of the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the level meter M is a meter whose value (a portion with a different display color) increases upward, and the value increases and decreases as the special figure variation display game progresses. Instead of displaying the level meter M on the display device 41, the right decorative light emitting member 676 (see FIG. 2) may be used as the level meter.

  If the chance mode continues, that is, if it is a common continuation effect, the level meter M reaches the maximum value (upper end) as shown in FIG. 79 (c), and it is notified that the chance mode continues. The Further, when the chance mode ends and the mode is shifted to the normal mode, that is, in the case of the common end effect, as shown in FIG. 79 (d), the value of the level meter M increases only halfway and the chance mode ends. It will be notified that it will do. Furthermore, in the case of shifting to the probability changing mode, that is, in the case of the common transition effect due to the 2R suddenness, the value of the level meter M is displayed shining as it reaches the maximum value (upper end), and the mode is shifted to the probability changing mode. Is notified. In addition, in the case of shifting to the latent mode, that is, in the case of the common transition effect due to the 2R latency, the value of the level meter M becomes 0, and it is notified that the mode is shifted to the latent mode.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the third operation state can be set as the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37. The third operation state has a longer normal power release time than the second operation state, and the number of times of normal power release is two times. The open time of the normally variable prize-winning device 37 per unit time is higher than that in the second operation state. Is a long state. In the following description, the second operation state is referred to as medium support A, and the third operation state is referred to as medium support B. Note that the third operation state is set so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is the shortest in the normal operation state and becomes longer in the order of the second operation state, the third operation state, and the first operation state. What is necessary is just to change any of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of times of normal power release, and the normal power release time with respect to the second operation state.

  As shown in FIG. 81, 2R medium support B (symbol) is added to the type of special result. The 2R medium support A corresponds to the 2R medium support in the first embodiment. In the case of 2R medium support B (symbol), after the special gaming state, the high probability state and the third operation state (medium support B) until the next big hit.

  FIG. 82 shows the types of effect states and transition conditions. The production state of this embodiment is divided into the chance mode A and the chance mode B according to the operation state, with the production state that was the latent mode A in the first embodiment as the latent mode, and the production state that was in the latent mode B. Yes. Each performance state can be clearly distinguished by the player.

  The chance mode A is a mode that is shifted to when the support A during 2R is reached in each mode. In this mode, the high-probability state and the second operation state are set. Further, the chance mode B is a mode that shifts when the support B during 2R is reached in each mode, and further shifts to the chance mode B when a small hit is made in the normal mode. When the mode is shifted to the chance mode B by becoming the support B during 2R, the high probability state and the third operation state are obtained. When the mode is shifted to the chance mode B by the small hit in the normal mode, the normal probability state and the normal state are set. It remains in the operating state. In this case, the game is returned to the normal mode by playing the special figure variation display game of the prescribed number (10 times).

  FIG. 83 shows the execution mode of the special figure variation display game that is the prescribed number of times in the chance mode B. In this special figure fluctuation display game, a special fluctuation pattern is selected as in the first embodiment. Thereby, in the case of 2R big hit, small hit, and off, the execution time of the production can be made common, and the common production data can be used, so that the production data that needs to be stored can be reduced.

  Moreover, the execution mode of the special gaming state based on 2R jackpot differs depending on the type of special result. In the case of 2R accuracy, 2A support A, and 2R latency, the number of rounds is two, and the openable time of the special variable winning device 38 in each round is the second openable time (0.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the case of support 2 during 2R, the number of rounds is 2 and the openable time of the special variable winning device 38 in each round is the third openable time (2 seconds). Therefore, more out-of-balls can be gained in Sapo B during 2R than in other 2R big hits. Further, even in the specific gaming state based on the small hit, the operation mode is the same as that of the 2R support B.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the selection ratio of the 2R jackpot type in the chance mode B is high in the selection ratio of the support 2B in 2R which is a special result of the type in which the chance mode B is selected again. 2R latency is not selected. Therefore, if it becomes support mode B during 2R and shifts to chance mode B, it stays in chance mode B while securing a few exits in a special game state based on support mode 2R, and eventually gains a large number of exits Opportunities can be obtained for possible big hits (15R probability variation, 15R normal or 2R accuracy).

  Further, in the chance mode B, an effect is provided by the number of balls obtained in the special game state based on the support B during 2R. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the chance mode B is entered, a display that prompts the player to acquire a lot of balls in the special game state based on the support B during 2R is performed. When the game progresses as shown in FIG. 84 (b) and a big hit of support B in 2R occurs as shown in FIG. 84 (c), the special game as shown in FIGS. 84 (d) and (e). It becomes a state. In this special game state, three game balls have flowed into the special variable prize winning device 38 and 27 prize balls have been acquired. The obtained number of winning balls is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 41b in the upper right part of the display area. Is done.

  After that, when the big hit of support B in 2R occurs and the special gaming state is entered as shown in FIGS. 54 (f) and 54 (g), the number of winning balls acquired is added. In this special game state, two game balls flow into the special variable prize-winning device 38 and 18 prize balls have been acquired, and 18 is added to the number of 27 prize balls that have already been acquired, resulting in the number of acquired balls. 45 is displayed in the display area 41b. The addition of the obtained number of prize balls is displayed until 15R big hit occurs.

  Then, when a 15R big hit occurs as shown in FIG. 54 (h), an effect based on the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is performed as shown in FIG. 54 (i). Here, the greater the number of winning balls acquired, the greater the number of songs that can be selected as music flowing during the special game state.

  By doing in this way, it becomes a standby mode until chance mode B acquires a lot of balls, and it can raise a player's expectation. Further, in this chance mode B, it is possible to acquire some balls, so that the player's expectation can be maintained. Furthermore, since the performance is performed by the ball obtained in the chance mode B, the interest of the special game state generated in the chance mode B can be improved and the stoppage can be prevented. Such an effect may be performed even in a specific gaming state based on a small hit. Furthermore, it may be performed when 2R big hit or small hit occurs in other modes.

  As shown in FIG. 55, two types of 2R latency and small hits may be set. In the case of 2R latent A and small hit A, the number of rounds is two rounds, the openable time of the special variable winning device 38 in each round is the second openable time (0.5 seconds), and 2R latent B and small hit B In this case, the number of rounds is 2 and the openable time of the special variable winning device 38 in each round is the third openable time (2 seconds). Further, when the small hit A is reached, the mode is shifted to the chance mode A, and when the small hit B is reached, the mode is shifted to the chance mode B.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment can execute a special effect when the latent mode continues for a predetermined period.

  The gaming machine of this embodiment includes a center case 40 shown in FIG. The center case 40 includes a first movable effect member 731 that can be moved up and down at a position above the display device 41. The first movable effect member 731 is retracted upward from the front of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 86 (a), and overlaps the front of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 86 (c). It can be converted to. Here, the first movable effect member 731 is used to make a one-shot notification (prefetch effect) that clearly notifies that a 15R big hit will occur as a special effect.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), a decoration start memory display 41c corresponding to the start memory is displayed below the display area of the display device 41. The decoration start memory display 41c corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the left side of the display area, and the decoration start memory display 41c corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the right side of the display area. The decoration start memory display 41c corresponds to the oldest start memory at the left end, and moves to the left one by one as the special figure variation display game is started and the start memory is consumed. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 86A, there are three first start memories and no second start memories.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the latent mode is continued for a predetermined period and a special effect (single notification) can be executed, if the first movable effect member 731 descends, 15R big hit It is displayed that it will be notified. As shown in FIG. 86 (b) during the period in which this special effect can be executed, when a start memory a that is a 15R big hit occurs, the first movable effect member 731 descends as shown in FIG. 86 (c). , One notification that notifies of the existence of the start memory that becomes 15R big hit is executed. By performing such a special effect, it is possible to eliminate a player's dissatisfaction due to a long state in which a large amount of game balls are consumed while being in a high probability state.

[Ending process]
In order to perform such control, an ending process shown in FIG. 87 is performed instead of the ending process shown in FIG. In this ending process, when the set mode is the latent mode (step B157; Yes), the value of the latent counter that counts the number of times of transition to the latent mode after setting the specific effect variation number (step B159). +1 is updated (step B191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the latent counter has reached a predetermined value (step B192). If the value has reached the predetermined value (step B192; Yes), one notification period information is set (step B193), and correspondingly. A process for setting the fluctuation pattern table is performed (step B160). If the predetermined value has not been reached (step B192; No), processing for setting the corresponding variation pattern table is performed (step B160).

[Ending process for small hits]
Also, instead of the small hitting ending process shown in FIG. 74, the small hitting ending process shown in FIG. 88 is performed. In this small hitting ending process, after setting the mode state to be shifted based on the stay mode information (step B177), it is determined whether the set mode is a latent mode (step B201). If the set mode is not the latent mode (step B201; No), the corresponding variation pattern table is set (step B178), and the small hitting ending process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the set mode is the latent mode (step B201; Yes), the value of the latent counter that counts the number of times of transition to the latent mode is updated by +1 (step B202). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the latent counter has reached a predetermined value (step B203). If the value has reached the predetermined value (step B203; Yes), one notification period information is set (step B204), and correspondingly. The variation pattern table is set (step B178), and the small hitting ending process is terminated. If the predetermined value has not been reached (step B203; No), the corresponding variation pattern table is set (step B178), and the small hitting ending process is terminated. By these processes, when the latent mode is continued for a predetermined period, the first movable effect member 731 can execute a one-shot notification for notifying the occurrence of the 15R jackpot as a special effect.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In the prefetch command reception process (step B78) in the first scene control process shown in FIG. 79, the process shown in FIG. 89 is performed. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B211). If not received (step B211; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it has been received (step B211; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B212), and it is determined whether it is the one notification period (step B213).

  The case of one notification period is a state in which one notification period information set in the above-described ending process or small hitting ending process is set. If it is not this one notification period (step B213; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. If it is the one notification period (step B213; Yes), it is determined whether the prefetching result is a big hit (step B214). If the prefetching result is not a big hit (step B214; No), the prefetching command receiving process is terminated. If the prefetch result is a big hit (step B214; Yes), information on the big hit is acquired (step B215).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a 15R big hit (step B216). If it is not a big hit for 15R (step B217; No), the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. If it is 15R big hit (step B217; Yes), one notification information is set (step B218), one notification period information is cleared (step B219), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. As a special effect, the first movable effect member 731 notifies the occurrence of the 15R jackpot as a special effect when the latent mode has continued for a predetermined period of time and a start-up memory is generated. Is done.

  The notification of the existence of the start memory that becomes a big hit is made by changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display 41c displayed on the display device 41 in addition to the operation of the first movable effect member 731 or when the start memory is generated (start You may make it perform by the audio | voice output etc. at the time of winning a prize or the display start of the decoration start memory display 41c. Further, as a special effect that can be executed when the latent mode is continued for a predetermined period, an effect that does not normally appear may be performed in addition to the notification of the existence of the start memory that becomes a big hit.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this embodiment differs in the execution aspect of prefetching production.

  The selection ratio of the special result differs depending on the gaming state when the special result occurs, but the type of the special result in the prefetching process is determined based on the gaming state when the start memory is generated. Therefore, for example, in the normal probability state and the normal operation state, as shown in FIG. 90, when the start memory determined to be 2R latent is first and the start memory determined to be 2R sudden is later Inconvenience may occur. In other words, since the selection ratio of 2R accuracy is reduced from 10% to 2% due to occurrence of 2R latency, if 2R accuracy is predicted in the state shown in FIG. 90, 2R accuracy may not actually occur. There is. As described above, when there is a start memory that may be in a disadvantageous state than the prefetch result, the prefetch effect on the start memory is regulated.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform such control, in the prefetch command reception process (step B78) in the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. 69, the process shown in FIG. 91 is performed. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B221), and if not received (step B221; No), The prefetch command reception process ends. If it is received (step B221; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B222), and the prefetch information of the hold (startup memory) is acquired (step B223). It is checked whether it is a specific hold (step B224).

  The specific hold is a start memory that has a special result in the start memory, but has a start memory that has a special result in the start memory to be digested first, and thus may be in a disadvantageous state than the pre-read result. . When it is not this specific hold (step B225; No), a normal prefetch effect setting process is performed (step B228), and the prefetch command reception process is terminated. In this case, a prefetch effect is performed with a predetermined probability. If it is specific hold (step B225; Yes), the prefetch effect restriction flag is set (step B226), the restriction target flag is set in the hold memory area of the hold (step B227), and the prefetch command reception process Exit. In this case, the pre-reading effect for the start memory is not performed.

[Variation pattern information setting process]
Also, instead of the variation pattern information setting process shown in FIG. 72, the variation pattern information setting process shown in FIG. 92 is performed. In this variation pattern information setting process, after performing the process from step B131 to step 141, it is checked whether there is a restriction target flag (step B231). When there is no restriction target flag (step B232; No), the variation pattern information setting process is terminated. If there is a restriction target flag (step B232; Yes), the restriction target flag is cleared (step B233), and the variation pattern information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the prefetch effect can be performed again by starting the special figure variation display game based on the start memory in which execution of the prefetch effect is restricted.

  In the case where there is a start memory that becomes a special result, the subsequent start memory may perform a prefetch determination based on the selection ratio of the special result in the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state based on the special result. . In this case, for example, in the game control device 100, when there is a start memory that becomes a special result, a flag relating to the symbol random number table corresponding to the type of the special result is set, and the subsequent prefetch determination is based on the flag. The type of special result is determined based on the random number table. In addition, when the state shown in FIG. 90 is reached, the start memory that is executed after the start memory for 2R latency and before the start memory for the next special result (in FIG. 90, the second and third start memories). As for (memory), if a special result (for example, support during 2R) occurs, a notification that the type of the subsequent special result is 2R suddenly may be made. Further, instead of restricting the execution of the prefetching effect, the prefetching effect that clearly informs the result may be regulated so as to perform the prefetching effect that becomes a big hit.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, display control of jackpot history information is performed by the effect control device 300.

  Here, the “hit history information” includes, for example, the number of times that a big hit has occurred in the past (for example, last time, last two times, three times before, etc.), the name of the reach that occurred in the previous stage of the big hit Reach name information that indicates, jackpot start number information that indicates the number of executions of the special figure variation display game between the big hits after the previous big hit occurs, and the big hit symbol when the big hit occurs Includes jackpot symbol information.

FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when the big hit history information is displayed on the display device 41.
The display screen shown in FIG. 93 displays reach name information for each jackpot, jackpot start number information, and jackpot symbol information for the past 1 to 10 times.
Here, the number (for example, 6) surrounded by a circle in the jackpot symbol information when the big hit of the past six times has occurred indicates that the promotion effect display was promoted from the normal big hit to the probable big hit during the big hit. ing.
Further, the ☆ mark in the jackpot symbol information 10 times before the past indicates that it is a jackpot symbol of special results such as 2R accuracy (symbol), 2R support (symbol), 2R latency (symbol).
In the present embodiment, the jackpot history information is controlled to be displayed when the player operates the effect button 25 during a so-called customer waiting state. It may be displayed during the period.
Also, as shown in FIG. 93, a matrix type two-dimensional code may be displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen so that the code can be read by a mobile phone or the like and the display screen can be taken into a mobile phone or the like. . Further, the code may be displayed on the display device 41 on condition that a predetermined operation (such as pressing the effect button 25) by the player is performed.

Next, a display mode when displaying the big hit history information will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (e), the production control device 300 has three types of tables, that is, normal history screen display tables A to C that are selected in the normal state, and a specific state (specific game history state). 5 types of tables of the two types of specific history screen display tables A or B selected in (1) are stored.
The normal history screen display tables A to C and the specific history screen display tables A and B each include a uniform display mode.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), the normal history screen display table A includes three display modes a to c corresponding to the number of jackpot history times (past 1 to 10 times, 11 to 20 times, and 21 to 30 times). Types of display mode information are included. Further, as shown in FIGS. 94B and 94C, the normal history screen display table B includes three types of display mode information of display modes d to f, and the normal history screen display table C includes Three types of display mode information of display modes g to i are included.
In the normal state, the display mode is changed to the first cycle every time the player presses the select button 29, and the display mode d is changed from the display mode a → the display mode b → the display mode c. The display mode is switched in the order of display mode e and the display mode f, and the third mode is switched in the order of display mode g → display mode h → display mode i. And it returns to the display mode a and is controlled to repeat the display mode b → display mode c →.

As shown in FIG. 94 (d), the specific history screen display table A includes three display modes j to l corresponding to the number of jackpot history times (past 1 to 10, 11 to 20, 21 to 30). Types of display mode information are included.
The specific history screen display table A is a table that is selected at the time of so-called staleness when a big hit is not generated even when a special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times).
When the selection is made by the player, the display mode is controlled so that the display mode is switched in the order of display mode j → display mode k → display mode l → display mode j → display mode k →. .

As shown in FIG. 94 (e), the specific history screen display table B includes three display modes m to o corresponding to the number of jackpot history times (past 1 to 10, 11 to 20, 21 to 30 times). Types of display mode information are included.
The specific history screen display table B is a table that is selected when a predetermined condition related to the big hit is achieved, for example, when a big hit with all symbols occurs.
When the condition is satisfied, the display mode is controlled so that the display mode is switched in order of display mode m → display mode n → display mode o → display mode m → display mode n →. ing.

Next, the detail of the 1st information storage area of the production | presentation control apparatus 300 which memorize | stores jackpot history information is demonstrated.
As shown in FIG. 95, the first information storage area includes four storage areas: a big hit symbol storage area, a big hit count storage area, a big hit occurrence reach information storage area, and a big hit start count storage area.

In the jackpot symbol storage area, information related to the symbol that generated the jackpot is stored. Thereby, the production control device 300 can display a jackpot symbol as the jackpot history information.
The big hit count storage area stores the big hit count information counted regardless of the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit. Thereby, the production control device 300 can display the big hit history number as the big hit history information in association with other information (reach name, big hit start number, and big hit symbol).
In addition, the jackpot occurrence reach information storage area stores information related to the reach that caused the jackpot. Thereby, the production control device 300 can display the reach name as the jackpot history information.
Also, in the jackpot start count storage area, information on the number of times of change from the end of one big hit until the next big hit (the number of executions of the special figure variation display game) is stored. Thereby, the production control device 300 can display the number of big hits as the big hit history information.

Next, the display timing of the jackpot history information will be described.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot history information can be displayed on the display device 41 when the waiting demo command or the power-on command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. .
In the following description, it is assumed that a normal jackpot history screen (see FIGS. 97A to 97C) is displayed on the display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 transmits a waiting-for-customer command when a missing symbol is confirmed and a predetermined time (stop time value) elapses without special figure holding storage. Will be. When the production control device 300 receives the customer waiting command (point 1), the normal customer waiting operation state is entered.
Next, when 120000 ms elapses without the player pressing the production button 25 in the normal customer waiting operation state, a customer waiting movie (moving image) is displayed, and the production button 25 is not pushed down for a predetermined time ( When the predetermined movie time value elapses, the process returns to point 1 and again enters the normal customer waiting operation state.

Further, when the player presses the effect button 25 in the normal customer waiting operation state or while the customer waiting movie is being displayed, the process proceeds to point 2. Then, the normal history screen display table A is selected as the first cycle. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), as the first history screen of the normal history screen display table A, two clouds having different heights on the left and right are displayed. In the display mode a as the background (see FIG. 94 (a)), the jackpot history information for the past 1 to 10 times is displayed for 10000 ms.
Subsequently, when the select button 29 is pressed while the big hit history information in the display mode a is displayed, the process proceeds to the point 3 and, as shown in FIG. In the display mode b (see FIG. 94 (a)) with two clouds at the background, the jackpot history information for the past 11 to 20 times is displayed for 10000 ms. Similarly, when the select button 29 is pressed while the big hit history information in the display mode b is displayed, the process proceeds to point 4 and the third history screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (c). In the display mode c (see FIG. 94A) with two clouds at the lower level as the background, the jackpot history information from the past 21 to 30 times before is displayed for 10000 ms.
Furthermore, if the select button 29 is pressed while the big hit history information in the display mode c is displayed, the process returns to the point 2. Then, the normal history screen display table B is selected as the second cycle, and as the first history screen of the normal history screen display table B, the jackpot history information from the past 1 to 10 times is displayed for 10000 ms in the display mode d. Is done.

  In addition, after this, every time the select button 29 is pressed by the player, after the jackpot history information from the past 11 to 20 times in the display mode e is displayed as the second history screen, the third history screen is displayed. As the first to third history screens, and the normal history screen display table C is selected as the third cycle, and the first to third history screens are displayed in the display modes g to i. The jackpot history information will be displayed. If the select button 29 is pressed while the big hit history information in the display mode i is displayed, the process returns to the first cycle and the big hit history information in the display mode a is displayed.

  Also, if the player presses the effect button 25 during each display of the first to third history screens, or if 10000 ms elapses without the effect button 25 being pressed, the process returns to point 1 and waits for a normal customer again. It becomes an operation state.

When the specific history screen display table A is selected, the middle raindrop is lower than the left and right raindrops as the first history screen of the specific history screen display table A as shown in FIG. In the display mode j (see FIG. 94 (d)) with the three raindrops at the background as the background, the jackpot history information for the past 1 to 10 times is displayed for 10000 ms.
Subsequently, when the select button 29 is pressed while the jackpot history information in the display mode j is displayed, the process proceeds to point 3 and, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the second history screen is displayed in the middle. In the display mode k (see FIG. 94 (d)) with three raindrops in a position where the raindrops are higher than the left and right raindrops, the jackpot history information for the past 11 to 20 times is displayed for 10000 ms. Similarly, when the select button 29 is pressed while the big hit history information in the display mode k is displayed, the process proceeds to point 4 and, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the third history screen is displayed. In the display mode 1 (see FIG. 94 (d)) with three raindrops at the upper level as the background, the jackpot history information for the past 21 to 30 times is displayed for 10000 ms.
Furthermore, if the select button 29 is pressed while the big hit history information in the display mode l is displayed, the process returns to the point 2. In the display mode j, the jackpot history information from the past 1 to 10 times is displayed for 10000 ms.

When the specific history screen display table B is selected, the left sun is lower than the right sun as the first history screen of the specific history screen display table B, as shown in FIG. 99 (a). In the display mode m (see FIG. 94 (e)) with two suns in the background as a background, the jackpot history information for the past 1 to 10 times is displayed for 10000 ms.
Subsequently, when the select button 29 is pressed while the jackpot history information in the display mode m is displayed, the process proceeds to point 3 and, as shown in FIG. In the display mode n (see FIG. 94 (e)) with two suns at a position higher than the right sun as the background, the jackpot history information for the past 11 to 20 times is displayed for 10000 ms. Similarly, when the select button 29 is pressed while the big hit history information in the display mode n is displayed, the process proceeds to point 4 and, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), the third history screen is displayed. In the display mode o (see FIG. 94 (e)) with two vertically aligned suns as background, the jackpot history information for the past 21 to 30 times is displayed for 10000 ms.
Furthermore, if the select button 29 is pressed while the big hit history information in the display mode o is displayed, the process returns to the point 2. And in the display mode m, the jackpot history information from the past 1 to 10 times is displayed for 10000 ms.

FIG. 100 shows a diagram for explaining the display timing of jackpot history information when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.
As shown in FIG. 100, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the game control device 100 transmits a power-on command. Then, the effect control device 300 enters the normal customer waiting operation state after performing a RAM initialization notification for a predetermined time (10000 ms) based on the reception of the power-on command (point 1).
Since the operation state and display timing of the jackpot history information after that are the same as those shown in FIG. 96, the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 101 shows a diagram for explaining the display timing of the jackpot history information when the power failure is recovered.
As shown in FIG. 101, when the power failure is recovered, the game control device 100 transmits a customer waiting demo command. When the production control device 300 receives the customer waiting demo command (point 1), the normal customer waiting operation state is entered.
Since the subsequent operation state and the display timing of the jackpot history information are the same as those shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, display control of jackpot history information executed by the effect control device 300 of this embodiment will be described.

[1st main processing]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the 1st main process shown in FIG. 102 is performed instead of the 1st main process shown in FIG. In this 1st main process, after performing the effect button input process (step B19) and before performing the game control command analysis process (step B20), the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the select button 29 (SB) is used. A select button input process (step B300) for creating input information is performed.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 103 shows details of the power-on process (step B68) executed in the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether there is an effect request flag (step B301).

If it is determined that there is no effect request flag (step B301; No), a RAM initialization notification process (step B302) is performed, and the power-on process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an effect request flag (step B301; Yes), a RAM initialization process is set (step B303), and a customer waiting screen process number “0” is set (step B304).

Next, a customer waiting demo timer (RAM initialization time value; 10000 ms) is set (step B
305) After setting an initial value in each storage area (step B306), the normal history display table A (see FIG. 94A) is set as the history screen display table information (step B307).

  Next, a PB operation invalid flag that invalidates the operation of the effect button 25 (push button; PB) is set (step B308), the effect request flag is cleared (step B309), and the power-on process is terminated.

[Waiting for customers]
FIG. 104 shows details of the customer waiting process (step B70) executed in the first scene control process shown in FIG. In this customer waiting process, it is first determined whether there is an effect request flag (step B311).

Here, when it is determined that there is no production request flag (step B311; No), a customer waiting screen setting process (step B312) is performed, and the customer waiting process is terminated. Details of the customer waiting screen setting process (step B312) will be described later.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an effect request flag (step B311; Yes), it is checked whether the power failure is restored (waiting for customers) (step B313).

Here, when it is determined that the power failure is not restored (waiting for customers) (step B314; No), a movable body request set is performed (step B315), and the process proceeds to step B317.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is restored (waiting for customers) (step B314; Yes), the power-on flag is cleared (step B316), and the process proceeds to step B317.

  In step B317, the customer waiting screen processing number “1” is set (step B317), and a customer waiting demo timer (customer waiting time value; 120000 ms) is set (step B318). Subsequently, a PB operation valid flag for validating the operation of the effect button 25 (push button; PB) is set (step B319), the effect request flag is cleared (step B320), and the customer waiting process is terminated.

[Customer waiting screen setting process]
FIG. 105 shows the customer waiting screen setting process (step B312) in the customer waiting process shown in FIG. In this customer waiting screen setting process, first, a customer waiting screen process number is referred to (step B321), and a branch process (step B322) based on the referred customer waiting screen process number is performed.

  In the branch process (step B322) based on the customer waiting screen process number, a process to be executed is selected based on the referred process number. If the referenced process number is “0”, a RAM initialization notification process (step B323) is performed. If the referenced process number is “1”, a normal customer waiting process (step B324) relating to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed. If the referenced process number is “2”, the customer waiting movie process (step B325) relating to the display of the customer waiting movie (moving image) is performed. If the referenced process number is “3”, the first history screen process (step B326) relating to the display of the jackpot history information in the first cycle is performed. If the referenced process number is “4”, the second history screen process (step B327) related to the display of the jackpot history information in the second cycle is performed. If the referenced process number is “5”, a third history screen process (step B328) relating to the display of jackpot history information in the third cycle is performed.

[Normal customer waiting process]
FIG. 106A shows a normal customer waiting process (step B324) in the customer waiting screen setting process shown in FIG. In this normal customer waiting process, first, it is checked whether the customer waiting demo timer has expired (step B331).

Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has not expired (step B332; No), the normal customer waiting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer is up (step B332; Yes), update request data (customer waiting movie) for performing a movable body request set (step B63) and displaying the customer waiting movie is displayed. ) Is set (step B 334), the customer waiting screen processing number “2” is set (step B 335).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo timer (time value of the customer waiting movie) is set (step B336), a customer waiting movie is set (step B337), and the normal customer waiting process is terminated.

[Waiting movie processing]
FIG. 106B shows a customer waiting movie process (step B325) in the customer waiting screen setting process shown in FIG. In this customer waiting movie process, first, it is checked whether the customer waiting demo timer has expired (step B341).

Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has not expired (step B342; No), the customer waiting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has expired (step B342; Yes), update request data (customer) for performing a movable body request set (step B343) and updating to the normal customer waiting operation state is performed. (Wait) is set (step B344).

  Subsequently, the customer waiting screen process number “1” is set (step B345), the customer waiting demo timer (customer waiting time value: 120000 ms) is set (step B346), and the customer waiting process is terminated.

[First history screen processing]
FIG. 107A shows the first history screen process (step B326) in the customer waiting screen setting process shown in FIG. In this first history screen processing, first, it is checked whether the customer waiting demo timer has expired (step B351).

Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has not expired (step B352; No), the first history screen process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has timed out (step B352; Yes), a movable body request set (step B353) is performed, and update request data (customer) for updating to the normal customer waiting operation state is performed. (Wait) is set (step B354).

  Subsequently, the customer waiting screen processing number “1” is set (step B355), the customer waiting demo timer (customer waiting time value: 120000 ms) is set (step B356), the customer waiting background is set (step B357), The first history screen process is terminated.

[Second history screen processing]
FIG. 107 (b) shows the second history screen process (step B327) in the customer waiting screen setting process shown in FIG. In the second history screen process, as in the first history screen process, first, it is checked whether or not the customer waiting demo timer has expired (step B361).

Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has not expired (step B362; No), the second history screen process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has expired (step B362; Yes), update request data (customer) for performing a movable body request set (step B363) and updating to the normal customer waiting operation state is performed. (Wait) is set (step B364).

  Subsequently, the customer waiting screen processing number “1” is set (step B365), the customer waiting demo timer (customer waiting time value; 120000ms) is set (step B366), the customer waiting background is set (step B367), The second history screen process is terminated.

[Third history screen processing]
FIG. 107 (c) shows the third history screen process (step B328) in the customer waiting screen setting process shown in FIG. In the third history screen process, as in the first and second history screen processes, first, it is checked whether the customer waiting demo timer has expired (step B371).

Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has not expired (step B372; No), the third history screen process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer waiting demo timer has expired (step B372; Yes), update request data (customer) for performing a movable body request set (step B373) and updating to the normal customer waiting operation state is performed. (Wait) is set (step B374).

  Subsequently, the customer waiting screen processing number “1” is set (step B375), the customer waiting demo timer (customer waiting time value: 120000 ms) is set (step B376), the customer waiting background is set (step B377), The third history screen process is terminated.

[Fluctuation processing]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the changing process shown in FIG. 108 is performed instead of the changing process shown in FIG. In this variation processing, after performing variation pattern information setting processing (step B95), variation count management processing (step B94) is performed.

[Variation frequency management process]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variation number management process shown in FIG. 109 is performed instead of the variation number management process shown in FIG. In this variation count management process, after the time reduction flag is cleared in step B135 (step B135), the determined variation pattern information is acquired (step B381), and the variation pattern information generates a big hit or a small hit. It is determined whether or not the pattern is a small hit occurrence pattern (step B382).

  When it is determined that the pattern is not a big hit / small hit occurrence pattern (step B382; No), the value of the big hit start count storage area (see FIG. 95) is updated by +1 (step B383), and the updated big hit start count is It is determined whether or not the number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 500 times), that is, whether or not it is a so-called humming time (step B384).

  Here, when it is determined that the number of big hits is not a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) or more (step B384; No), the variation number management process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of big hits is a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) or more (step B384; Yes), the set history screen display table information is acquired (step B385), and the acquired history screen is acquired. It is determined whether or not the display table information is information relating to the specific history screen display table B (see FIG. 94 (e)) (step B386).

  Here, when it is determined that the history screen display table information is not information related to the specific history screen display table B (step B386; No), the history screen display table is changed to the specific history screen display table A set at the time of so-called humming. The setting is made (step B387), and the variation count management process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the history screen display table information is information related to the specific history screen display table B (step B386; Yes), the number of changes is managed while the history screen display table is set to the specific history screen display table B. The process ends. That is, when the specific history screen display table B is already set, the table is not switched to other tables.

  If it is determined that the pattern is a big hit / small hit occurrence pattern (step B382; Yes), reach information on the fluctuation is set in the big hit occurrence reach information storage area (see FIG. 95) (step B388). Next, the jackpot symbol information in the variation is set in the jackpot symbol storage area (see FIG. 95) (step B389).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the set history screen display table is the specific history screen display table A (step B390).
If it is determined that the history screen display table is not the specific history screen display table A (step B391; No), step B392 is skipped and the process proceeds to step B393. On the other hand, when it is determined that the history screen display table is the specific history screen display table A (step B391; Yes), the history screen display table is set to the normal history screen display table A (see FIG. 94 (a)). (Step B392), the process proceeds to Step B393.

In Step B393, it is determined whether or not the big hit condition that the big hits for all symbols are generated by the big hit or the small hit generated this time has been achieved (Step B393).
Here, when it is determined that the condition related to the big hit of generating all the symbols is not achieved (step B393; No), the variation number management process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition related to the jackpot has been achieved (step B393; Yes), the history screen display table is set to the specific history screen display table B (see FIG. 94 (e)) (step B394), and the change is made. The number management process ends.

[Fanfare treatment]
FIG. 110 shows the fanfare process (step B72) executed in the first scene control process shown in FIG. In this fanfare process, it is first determined whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B401).

If it is determined that there is no effect request flag (step B401; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the update timer is 0 (step B402).
If it is determined that the value of this update timer is 0 (step B402; Yes), it is determined whether or not the scene is the final scene (step B403).

  Here, when it is determined that the scene is the final scene (step B403; Yes), the end of the fanfare is set (step B404), and the fanfare processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the update timer is not 0 (step B402; No) or when it is determined that the scene is not the final scene (step B403; No), the fanfare is not set to end. The process ends.

  If it is determined that there is an effect request flag (step B401; Yes), the game mode state at the time of the big hit is held (step B405). Next, a jackpot symbol is set (step B406), and information is reset according to the jackpot (step B407). Then, the value of the big hit count storage area (see FIG. 95) is updated by +1 (step B408), the effect request flag is cleared (step B409), and the fanfare process is terminated.

[PB input processing]
FIG. 111 shows the PB input process (step B19) in the first main process shown in FIG. In this PB input process, first, it is checked whether or not it is a PB operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 25 (push button; PB) is valid (step B411).

  Here, when it is determined that it is not the PB operation valid period (step B412; No), the PB input process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the PB operation valid period (step B412; Yes), it is checked whether there is an operation input by the effect button 25 (push button; PB) (step B413).

  Here, when it is determined that there is no operation input by the effect button 25 (step B414; No), the PB input process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an operation input from the effect button 25 (step B414; Yes), it is checked whether the customer is waiting based on the command identifier of the received command (step B415).

  If it is determined that the customer is not waiting (step B416; No), a PB effect setting process (step B417) based on the corresponding state is performed, and the PB input process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer is waiting (step B416; Yes), it is checked whether the history screen display relating to the jackpot is being displayed (step B418).

  If it is determined that the history screen is not being displayed (step B419; No), the set history screen display table information is acquired (step B420), and the history screen display setting process (step B421) is performed.

  Next, the customer waiting screen processing number “3” is set (step B422), and the customer waiting demo timer (specified value for history display) is set (step B423). Subsequently, the invalid setting process (step B424) of the operation button 25 (push button; PB) operation is performed, the valid flag of the select button 29 operation is set (step B425), and the PB input process is ended.

  If it is determined that the history screen is being displayed (step B419; Yes), the customer waiting screen processing number “1” is set (step B426), and the customer waiting demo timer (customer waiting time value: 120000ms) is set. (Step B427), a customer waiting background is set (Step B428), and the PB input process is terminated. That is, when there is an operation input of the production button 25 (push button; PB) while the history screen is being displayed (the first to third history screens are being displayed; see FIG. 96), the normal customer waiting operation state is restored.

[PB invalid setting processing]
FIG. 112 shows the PB invalid setting process (step B424) in the PB input process shown in FIG. In this PB invalidation setting process, first, a PB operation invalidation flag for invalidating the operation of the effect button 25 (push button; PB) is set (step B431). Subsequently, a PB operation invalid timer (500 ms) is set (step B432).

Next, it is determined whether or not the PB operation invalid timer has expired (step B433).
Here, when it is determined that the time is not up (step B433; No), the determination process of step B433 is repeatedly performed until it is determined that the time is up. As described above, after the operation input of the effect button 25 (push button; PB), the operation input of the effect button 25 for 500 ms is invalidated, thereby preventing the player from repeatedly hitting the effect button 25. If it is determined that the time is up (step B433; Yes), the PB operation invalid flag is cleared (step B434), the PB operation valid flag is set (step B435), and then the PB invalid setting process is terminated. .

[SB input processing]
FIG. 113 shows the SB input process (step B300) in the first main process shown in FIG. In this SB input process, first, it is checked whether or not it is the SB operation valid period in which the operation of the select button (SB) 29 is valid (step B441).

  Here, when it is determined that it is not the SB operation valid period (step B442; No), the SB input process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SB operation is valid (step B442; Yes), it is checked whether there is an operation input from the select button 29 (step B443).

  Here, when it is determined that there is no operation input by the select button 29 (step B444; No), the SB input process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an operation input from the select button 29 (step B444; Yes), it is checked whether the customer is waiting based on the command identifier of the received command (step B445).

  If it is determined that the customer is not waiting (step B446; No), an SB effect setting process (step B447) based on the corresponding state is performed, and the SB input process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer is waiting (step B446; Yes), it is checked whether a history screen display relating to the jackpot is being displayed (step B448).

  Here, when it is determined that the history screen is not being displayed (step B449; No), the SB input process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the history screen is being displayed (step B449; Yes), the next history screen display table information is acquired (step B450), and the history screen display setting process (step B451) is performed.

  Subsequently, the customer waiting screen processing number is set based on the acquired history screen display table information (step B452), the customer waiting demo timer (specified value for history display) is set (step B453), and the SB input processing is terminated. To do.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (starting winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37). A display device 41 capable of displaying a figure variation display game, and a control means (game) for controlling to generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result (big hit) In the gaming machine including the control device 100 and the effect control device 300), the control means includes history information storage means (effect control device 300) for storing history information (hit history information) related to the game of the gaming machine, A notification ring having a plurality of history information notification control means (production control device 300) for notifying history information stored in the history information storage means, and a history information notification environment (display mode) for notifying history information. A notification environment table storage unit (effect control device 300) that stores a plurality of tables (history screen display tables) in association with game history states, and the history information notification control unit stores the history stored in the history information storage unit. Based on the information, it is provided with determination means (effect control device 300) for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in a specific game history state, and when the determination means determines that the game machine is in a specific game history state, The history information is notified in the history information notification environment (display modes j to l, mo) set based on the notification environment table (specific history screen display tables A and B) corresponding to the game history state.

Thereby, when it is determined by the determination means (effect control device 300) that the player is in a specific game history state, the history information notification control means (effect control device 300) notifies the notification environment table corresponding to the specific game history state. The history information can be notified in the history information notification environment set based on the above.
Accordingly, in the specific game history state, the history information can be notified in the history information notification environment specific to the specific game history state, so the history information of the current gaming machine is simply used as character information. In addition to providing notifications, it is possible to provide a history information notification environment that occurs only when the player is in a specific gaming history state, thereby attracting interest in the gaming machine.

  Further, the history information (big hit history information) stored in the history information storage means (production control device 300) includes history information related to the special result (big hit).

  Thereby, in the history information notification environment (display mode) set based on the notification environment table (history screen display table) corresponding to the game history state, history information regarding the big hit result (special result) can be notified. In addition to giving interest to the notification of the history information, the user can be interested in the history information notification environment when the history information is notified, and can be interested in the gaming machine.

  Further, the control means (production control device 300) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (starting winning port 36, normal variation winning device 37), and executes the special figure variable display game. When the start winning memory means (game control device 100) stores a predetermined number as the upper limit as the starting memory, and when no starting memory is generated in the start winning memory means for a predetermined period, the display mode on the display device 41 waits for the customer. Mode display control means (effect control device 300) for switching to the display mode, and the history information notification control means (effect control device 300) is the game history state when the mode display control means is switched to the customer waiting display mode. In the history information notification environment (display mode) set based on the notification environment table (history screen display table) corresponding to The fact that the notification of information).

  Thereby, in the so-called customer waiting state, the history information can be notified in the history information notification environment set based on the notification environment table corresponding to the game history state, so the player who is about to start the game from now on This makes it possible to use not only the history information but also the difference in the history information notification environment as a clue to selecting a gaming machine, so that the player can be interested in the gaming machine.

  In addition, the apparatus includes first operation means (production button 25) that can be operated by the player, and first detection means (production control device 300) that detects the operation of the first operation means, and includes history information notification control means (production). When the operation of the first operation means is detected by the first detection means when the mode display control means (effect control apparatus 300) is switched to the customer waiting display mode, the control device 300) Big hit history information) is notified.

  Thereby, the expert who knows that the history information is notified by operating the first operating means in the so-called waiting state can receive benefits that cannot be received by beginners and can feel a sense of superiority. It becomes like this.

  In addition, a second operation means (select button 29) that can be operated by the player and a second detection means (production control device 300) that detects an operation of the second operation means are provided, and a notification environment table storage means (production) The control device 300) stores a plurality of history information notification environments (display modes) of each notification environment table (history screen display table) in association with the history period of the history information (big hit history information), and history information notification control means (Effect control device 300) changes the history period of the history information each time the operation of the second operation means is detected by the second detection means in the state where the history information is being notified, The history information notification environment can be changed according to the change.

  As a result, by operating the second operating means, it is possible to view history information of different history periods each time the history information notification environment is changed, and it is possible to further attract interest in the gaming machine. become.

  In addition, in a specific game history state, there is a state in which a special figure variation display game that does not result in a special result (big hit) has been continuously performed a predetermined number of times or more and identification information derived when a special result is obtained. The state where the type is generated is included.

As a result, in a specific game history state, a state in which a special figure variation display game that does not become a big hit result (special result) has been continuously performed a predetermined number of times or more, and identification information derived when a special result is obtained. Therefore, a player who wants to see the history information notification environment set when the specific game history state occurs continues playing the game until the specific game history state is reached. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.
In addition, even if the special figure variation display game that does not become a big hit result (special result) continues to be played a predetermined number of times or more, a unique history information notification environment set based on the notification environment table corresponding to the state By showing to the player, it becomes possible to relieve dissatisfaction with the fact that it is hard to generate a big hit.

  Further, the history information notification control means (effect control device 300) is in a state where all types of identification information derived when the determination means (effect control device 300) results in a special result (big hit) have been generated. If determined, in the history information notification environment (display mode mo) set based on the notification environment table (history screen display table B) corresponding to the state, the history information (big hit history information) is notified, Thereafter, the control is performed so that the notification environment table is not changed until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

Thus, if it is determined that all types of identification information derived when a special result is obtained have been generated, the history information notification control unit thereafter turns off the power to the gaming machine. It is possible to control so as not to change the notification environment table set when the state occurs.
Therefore, when the state in which all kinds of identification information derived when a special result is obtained has not yet occurred, the willingness to generate the state can be improved. In addition, when the state has already occurred, it is possible to provide a history information notification environment that occurs only when the state is in the state until the gaming machine is turned off. Will be able to.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described sixth embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described.

  The game machine of this embodiment differs in the selection method of a history screen display table compared with the game machine of 6th Embodiment. Specifically, the gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to change the selection ratio of the history screen display table based on the gaming state.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the selection ratio of the history screen display table according to the gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 114, when the gaming state is a low probability and no power support state, the normal history screen display table A is 70/100 (70%), the normal history screen display table B is 20/100 (20%), The normal history screen display table C is selected at a rate of 10/100 (10%).
That is, when the jackpot history information is displayed in any of the display modes a to c (see FIG. 94A) included in the normal history screen display table A, the gaming state is in a low probability and no electric support state. It is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility.

  In the case of a high probability and medium support state, the normal history screen display table A is 30/100 (30%), the normal history screen display table B is 30/100 (30%), and the normal history screen display table C is 40. / 100 (40%).

In the case of high probability and no power support, the normal history screen display table A is 10/100 (10%), the normal history screen display table B is 30/100 (30%), and the normal history screen display table C is The ratio is selected at a ratio of 60/100 (60%).
That is, when the jackpot history information is displayed in any of the display modes g to i (see FIG. 94 (c)) included in the normal history screen display table C, the gaming state has a high probability and there is no electric support. It is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility of a so-called probability variation latent state.

  Note that the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, like the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, selects the specific history screen display table A (see FIG. 94 (d)) in the case of so-called humming, and the predetermined condition regarding the big hit When is established, the specific history screen display table B (see FIG. 94 (e)) is selected.

[PB input processing]
The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment performs a PB input process shown in FIG. 115 in place of the PB input process shown in FIG. 111 in order to perform a history screen display table setting process according to the gaming state. In this PB input process, when it is determined in step B419 that a history screen is being displayed (step B419; Yes), a display screen setting process for selecting a history screen display table according to the gaming state (step B460). Is supposed to do.

[Display screen setting process]
FIG. 116 shows the display screen setting process (step B460) in the PB input process shown in FIG. In this display screen setting process, first, the set history screen display table information is acquired (step B461). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired history screen display table information is information relating to a table other than the specific history display table (step B462).

Here, when it is determined that the information is not related to a table other than the specific history display table (step B462; No), the process proceeds to step B465.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the information is related to a table other than the specific history display table (step B462; Yes), a random number for determining the history screen display table information is acquired (step B463), and the current gaming state (probability information) Is acquired (step B464).

Based on the history screen display table information determination random number and the current gaming state, the corresponding history screen display table is set (step B465), the history screen display setting process (step B466) is performed, and the display screen setting process is terminated. To do.
Specifically, for example, the random number for determining the history screen display table information is a value from 0 to 99. When a random number that matches any of the values 0 to 69 among the setting values 0 to 99 is acquired in the low probability of game state and no electric support, the normal history screen display table A is selected and set. When a random number that matches any of the values 70 to 89 is acquired, the normal history screen display table B is selected, and when a random number that matches any of the set values 89 to 99 is acquired. The normal history screen display table C is selected and the history screen display table is set.

In the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the selection ratio of the history screen display table is changed according to the gaming state, but the selection ratio of the history screen display table may be changed by lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117, the effect control device 300 includes three tables, lottery tables A to C, and sets a table corresponding to the random number for determining the lottery table.
In this case, in order to determine the lottery table, the display screen setting process shown in FIG. 118 is performed instead of the display screen setting process shown in FIG. In this display screen setting process, when it is determined in step B462 that the information is related to a table other than the specific history display table (step B462; Yes), a lottery table determination random number is acquired (step B471), and correspondingly. A lottery table is set (step B472). Then, a random number for determining the history screen display table information is acquired (step B473), a corresponding history screen display table is set based on the random number for determining the history screen display table information (step B465), and a history screen display setting process is performed. (Step B466) is performed.

  In the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the display mode in the special figure variation display game immediately after the cancellation of the customer waiting state is set based on the mode lottery table corresponding to the set history screen display table.

[Fluctuation processing]
As described above, the changing process shown in FIG. 119 is performed instead of the changing process shown in FIG. 108 in order to set the display mode based on the mode lottery table corresponding to the history screen display table. In the changing process, after the changing time setting process is performed in step B98, the mode lottery process (step B480) is performed before the effect request flag is cleared (step B99).
In the changing process of the present embodiment, the display mode is set by the mode lottery process. However, when the normal history screen display table A is set without performing the mode lottery, the display mode is normally set. When the mode is set and the normal history screen display table B or C is set, the latent mode may be set.

[Mode lottery processing]
FIG. 120 shows the mode lottery process (step B480) in the changing process shown in FIG. In this mode lottery process, first, the set history screen display table information is acquired (step B481). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired history screen display table information is information related to the normal history screen display table (step B482).

  Here, when it is determined that the information is not related to the normal history screen display table (step B482; No), the mode lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information is related to the normal history screen display table (step B482; Yes), the mode lottery table is set based on the set history screen display table information (step B483). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121, when the normal history screen display table A is set, the mode lottery table A is set, and when the normal history screen display table B is set, the mode lottery is set. When the table B is set and the normal history screen display table C is set, the mode lottery table C is set.

Next, a random number for mode lottery is acquired (step B484), a corresponding mode state is set (step B485), and the mode lottery process is terminated.
In the mode lottery process of the present embodiment, the mode lottery is performed only when the set history screen display table is the normal history screen display table, but when the specific history screen display table is set. Alternatively, a mode lottery may be performed. For example, when the specific history screen display table A is set, the mode lottery table C is set, and the ratio at which the latent mode is set is increased.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, a high probability state with a high probability of a special result (big hit) and a low probability state with a lower probability of a special result than the high probability state are set. Probability setting means (game control device 100) is provided, and the notification environment table storage means (effect control device 300) is used when it is determined by the determination means (effect control device 300) that there is no specific game history state. A plurality of normal notification environment tables (normal history screen display tables A to C) to be stored, and the history information notification control means (effect control device 300) determines that the determination means determines that there is no specific game history state. Depending on the probability state set by the setting means, the selection ratio of the plurality of normal notification environment tables stored in the notification environment table storage means is varied.

  Accordingly, the selection ratio of the plurality of normal notification environment tables stored in the notification environment table storage unit is changed according to the probability state set by the probability setting unit, so the history based on the selected normal notification environment table By viewing the information notification environment, the player can infer the current probability state, and the interest of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

  The mode display control means (production control device 300) has a normal mode for informing whether the probability of a special result (big hit) is a high probability state or a low probability state, and a high probability of a special result. Probability ambiguous mode (latent mode) that informs unambiguously whether the state is a probability state or a low-probability state can be displayed on the display device 41, and a notification environment table set by the history information notification control means (production control device 300) Depending on the (history screen display table), the selection ratio of the normal mode and the probability fuzzy mode selected in the special figure variation display game restarted after switching to the customer waiting display mode is changed.

  Thereby, according to the notification environment table set by the history information notification control means, the selection ratio between the normal mode and the probability ambiguous mode selected in the special figure variable display game restarted after being switched to the customer waiting display mode. By viewing the history information notification environment based on the selected notification environment table, the player can select the mode selected in the special figure variable display game that is resumed after switching to the customer waiting display mode. It becomes possible to guess, and the interest of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

[First Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, when there is an operation input of the effect button 25 while waiting for a customer when the probability state is a high probability state, it is suggested that the game machine is in a high probability state.

[PB input processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the PB input process shown in FIG. 122 is performed instead of the PB input process shown in FIG. In this PB input process, when it is determined in step B419 that the history screen is not being displayed (step B419; No), the current gaming state (probability state) is notified before the display screen setting process (step B460) is performed. The probability notification setting process (step B490) is performed.

[Probability notification setting process]
FIG. 123 shows the probability notification setting process (step B490) in the PB input process shown in FIG. In this probability notification setting process, first, probability state information is acquired (step B491). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability state is a high probability state (step B492).

  Here, when it is determined that the probability state is not the high probability state (step B492; No), the probability notification setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is the high probability state (step B492; Yes), the high probability suggestion notification sound setting process (step B493) for outputting the notification sound suggesting the high probability state is performed, and the high probability The notification setting process ends.

In addition, the aspect which suggests that it is a high probability state is not restricted to the aspect which outputs the said notification sound, It suggests by operating the movable accessory (for example, downward movable production | generation member 751 etc.) provided in the center case 40. You may do it.
Further, when the player inputs an operation on the effect button 25 while waiting for a customer and the probability state at this time is a high probability state, a lottery is performed instead of necessarily performing the high probability suggestion notification sound setting process as described above. The high probability suggestion notification sound setting process may be performed at a predetermined rate.
Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 124, if it is determined in step B492 that the state is a high probability state (step B492; Yes), the notification lottery table A that is highly likely to win the notification lottery is stored. Set (step B501). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not a high probability state (step B492; No), the notification lottery table B lower than the notification lottery table A that is highly likely to win the notification lottery is set (step B502).

  Next, a random number for notification lottery is acquired (step B503), and a lottery processing for notification (step B504) is performed based on the set notification lottery table. Then, it is determined whether or not a lottery for notification is won (step B505).

  If it is determined that the notification lottery is won (step B505; Yes), a high probability suggestion notification sound setting process (step B493) is performed, and the probability notification setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery for notification has not been won (step B505; No), the probability notification setting process is terminated without performing the high probability suggestion sound setting process (step B493).

  The probability notification setting process may be executed also in the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. In the case of the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, in the SB input process (see FIG. 113), the probability notification setting process is performed when there is an operation input of the select button 29 during the history screen display.

[Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain.

  In the gaming machine according to the present modification, when the display mode to be transferred after the big hit ends is the latent mode, the latent mode is ended a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) regardless of the probability state. And, the reception timing of the customer waiting demonstration command by the production control device 300 is in the above-described latent mode, immediately after exiting the latent mode, or after the exit from the latent mode, a special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times. The history screen display table to be set, the display mode after cancellation of the customer waiting state, and the notification lottery table for determining whether or not to set the high-probability suggestion notification sound are made different.

[Ending process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the ending process shown in FIG. 125 is performed instead of the ending process shown in FIG. In this ending process, after acquiring information regarding the mode state to be transferred in step B156 (step B156), it is determined whether the set mode is a latent (medium support) mode (step B511).

  Here, when it is determined that the set mode is not the latent mode (step B511; No), the process proceeds to step B160. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set mode is the latent mode (step B511; Yes), the latent state flag is set (step B512), and the number of latent fluctuations (30) is set (step B513). The process proceeds to step B160.

[Variation frequency management process]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the variation number management process shown in FIG. 126 is performed instead of the variation number management process shown in FIG. In this variation count management process, after the time reduction flag is cleared in step B115 (step B115), it is determined whether there is a latent state flag (step B520).

  If it is determined that there is a latent state flag (step B521; Yes), the number of latent fluctuations is updated by -1 (step B522). Then, it is determined whether the number of latent fluctuations is 0 (step B523).

  If it is determined that the number of latent fluctuations is 0 (step B523; Yes), the latent state flag is cleared (step B524). Then, the latent loss flag is set (step B525), the number of changes in the special figure change display game after the latent loss (for example, 20) is set (step B526), and the process proceeds to step B527.

  Also, when it is determined that there is no latent state flag (step B521; No), or when it is determined that the number of latent fluctuations is not 0 (step B523; No), the process proceeds to step B527.

Next, in step B527, it is checked whether there is a latent omission flag (step B527).
If it is determined that there is a latent loss flag (step B528; Yes), the number of fluctuations after the latent loss is updated by -1 (step B529). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations after the latent loss is 0 (step B530).

If it is determined that the number of fluctuations after the latent loss is zero (step B530; Yes), the latent loss flag is cleared (step B531), the history display information setting process (step B532) is performed, and the fluctuation is detected. The number management process ends. In the history display information setting process, information related to the big hit, update setting of history display information (table) based on the updated information, and the like are performed.
When it is determined that there is no latent missing flag (step B528; No) or when it is determined that the number of changes after latent missing is not zero (step B530; No), history display information setting processing (step B532) And the variation count management process is terminated.

[Display screen setting process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the display screen setting process shown in FIG. 127 is performed instead of the display screen setting process shown in FIG. In this display screen setting process, the set history screen display table information is acquired (step B461), and it is determined that the history screen display table information is information related to a table other than the specific history display table (step B462). ; Yes) acquires the probability state information (step B541). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability state information is information related to a high probability state (step B542).

  Here, when it is determined that the probability state information is not information related to the high probability state (step B542; No), the normal history screen display table A is set as the history screen display table (step B543), and the history screen display setting is performed. Processing (step B551) is performed, and the display screen setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the probability state information is information related to the high probability state (step B542; Yes), information related to the latent state is acquired (step B544), and it is checked whether there is a latent state flag (step B545). .

Here, if it is determined that there is no latent state flag (step B546; No), it is checked whether there is a latent omission flag (step B547).
If it is determined that there is no latent omission flag (step B548; No), the normal history screen display table B is set as the history screen display table (step B549), and the history screen display setting process (step B551) is performed. To end the display screen setting process.
When it is determined that there is a latent state flag (step B546; Yes) or when it is determined that there is a latent missing flag (step B548; Yes), the normal history screen display table C is set as the history screen display table. (Step B550), the history screen display setting process (Step B551) is performed, and the display screen setting process is terminated.
That is, when the reception timing of the customer waiting demo command by the production control device 300 is in the latent mode, or immediately after leaving the latent mode (for example, the number of fluctuations after leaving the latent mode is 20 times or less) When the normal history screen display table C is set and the number of fluctuations after exiting the latent mode exceeds 20, the normal history screen display table B is set.

[Mode lottery processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the mode lottery process shown in FIG. 128 is performed instead of the mode lottery process shown in FIG. In this mode lottery process, the set history screen display table information is acquired (step B561), and when it is determined that the history screen display table information is information related to a table other than the specific history display table (step B562; Yes) acquires the probability state information (step B563). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability state information is information regarding a high probability state (step B564).

  Here, when it is determined that the probability state information is not information related to the high probability state (step B564; No), the mode lottery table A is set (step B565), and a random number for mode lottery is acquired (step B573). . Then, the corresponding mode state is set (step B574), and the mode lottery process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the probability state information is information related to the high probability state (step B564; Yes), information related to the latent state is acquired (step B566), and it is checked whether there is a latent state flag (step B567). .

Here, when it is determined that there is no latent state flag (step B568; No), it is checked whether there is a latent missing flag (step B569).
If it is determined that there is no latent omission flag (step B570; No), the mode lottery table B is set (step B571), and a random number for mode lottery is acquired (step B573). Then, the corresponding mode state is set (step B574), and the mode lottery process is terminated.

If it is determined that there is a latent state flag (step B568; Yes) or if it is determined that there is a latent missing flag (step B570; Yes), the mode lottery table C is set (step B572), A random number for mode lottery is acquired (step B573). Then, the corresponding mode state is set (step B574), and the mode lottery process is terminated.
That is, when the reception timing of the customer waiting demo command by the production control device 300 is in the latent mode, or immediately after leaving the latent mode (for example, the number of fluctuations after leaving the latent mode is 20 times or less) When the mode lottery table C is set and the number of fluctuations after exiting the latent mode exceeds 20, the mode lottery table B is set.

  When it is determined that the history screen display table information is not information related to a table other than the specific history display table (step B562; No), the mode lottery process is terminated.

Note that when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game immediately after the cancellation of the customer waiting state, the display mode may be shifted to the probability change mode.
As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.
On the other hand, the display mode may be shifted to the normal mode when a big hit occurs in the special figure changing display game immediately after the cancellation of the customer waiting state.
In such a case, the player is discouraged once. However, since a big hit occurs immediately after that, the interest in the big hit can be further enhanced.

[Probability notification setting process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability notification setting process shown in FIG. 129 is performed instead of the probability notification setting process shown in FIG. In this probability notification setting process, the set history screen display table information is acquired (step B581), and it is determined that the history screen display table information is information related to a table other than the specific history display table (step B582). ; Yes) acquires the probability state information (step B583). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability state information is information related to a high probability state (step B584).

  Here, when it is determined that the probability state information is not information related to the high probability state (step B584; No), the notification lottery table A (see FIG. 130A) is set (step B585), and the process proceeds to step B593. Transition.

  If it is determined that the probability state information is information related to the high probability state (step B584; Yes), information related to the latent state is acquired (step B586), and it is checked whether there is a latent state flag (step B587). .

Here, if it is determined that there is no latent state flag (step B588; No), it is checked whether there is a latent loss flag (step B589).
If it is determined that there is no latent omission flag (step B590; No), the notification lottery table B (see FIG. 130B) is set (step B591), and the process proceeds to step B593.

When it is determined that there is a latent state flag (step B588; Yes) or when it is determined that there is a latent missing flag (step B590; Yes), the notification lottery table C (see FIG. 130 (c)) is used. After setting (step B592), the process proceeds to step B593.
That is, when the reception timing of the customer waiting demo command by the production control device 300 is in the latent mode, or immediately after leaving the latent mode (for example, the number of fluctuations after leaving the latent mode is 20 times or less) When the notification lottery table C is set and the number of fluctuations after exiting the latent mode exceeds 20, the notification lottery table B is set.

  Subsequently, in step B593, a random number for notification lottery is acquired (step B593). Then, a notification lottery process (step B594) is performed based on the corresponding notification lottery table. When it is determined that the notification lottery is won (step B595; Yes), a high-probability suggestion notification sound setting process (step B596) is performed. To complete the probability notification setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification lottery is not won (step B595; No), the probability notification setting process is terminated without performing the high probability suggestion notification sound setting process (step B596).

  If it is determined that the history screen display table information is not information related to a table other than the specific history display table (step B582; No), the probability notification setting process ends.

In addition, the aspect which suggests that it is a high probability state is not restricted to the aspect which outputs the said notification sound, It suggests by operating the movable accessory (for example, downward movable production | generation member 751 etc.) provided in the center case 40. You may do it.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine in the second modification example of the seventh embodiment, the mode display control means (the effect control device 300) executes the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the special gaming state ends. The history information notification control means (production control device 300) waits for the customer by the mode display control means (production control device 300) after displaying the probability fuzzy mode. One normal notification environment table determined in advance from a plurality of normal notification environment tables (normal history screen display tables A to C) is set according to the timing of switching to the display mode.

Thus, after the probability ambiguous mode is displayed, one predetermined normal notification environment table can be set from a plurality of normal notification environment tables in accordance with the timing when the mode display control means switches to the customer waiting display mode. .
Therefore, by checking which normal notification environment table based on which normal notification environment table is set among the plurality of normal notification environment tables, the player can estimate the timing when the player enters the waiting state after the end of the special gaming state. Will be able to.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

In the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the jackpot history information is displayed on the display device 41. In addition to this, for example, as shown in FIG. 131, a sub-display (second display) is displayed on the right side of the display device 41. Display device), and the jackpot history information may be displayed on the sub-display.
As a result, the big hit history information can be suitably displayed even during execution of the special figure variation display game. In addition, when displaying the jackpot history information on the sub-display unit during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the sub-count when displaying the jackpot history information according to the reliability (expectation) of the reach generated in the game is displayed. The background display of the display may be different. In such a case, in addition to changing the background display, characters and the like may be displayed to more clearly suggest the degree of expectation for the big hit.
Also, when displaying the jackpot history information while waiting for a customer, the background display when displaying the jackpot history information should be different depending on the number of changes from the previous occurrence of the jackpot to the waiting state for the customer. May be.

When the big hit history information is displayed on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), a predetermined character image (for example, an image simulating a tiger) is displayed on the lower portion of the display device 41 from the left to the right of the screen. The player may press the effect button 25 at a timing when the predetermined character image passes through a predetermined position (for example, a position where the character display of “PUSH !!!!” is displayed here). If it is possible, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), a display indicating the probability state at that time (for example, a background display indicating that the latent probability change has been confirmed) may be performed. Further, in addition to the suggestion by the display, suggestion by sound (for example, a sound such as “Cui-N !!!!
Also, when the internal state of the gaming machine is set to a high probability state, the display speed for moving the predetermined character image from the left to the right of the screen as described above is set to be low, thereby setting the predetermined position. May be made easier for the player to press the effect button 25 at the timing when the predetermined character image passes. Further, the display speed for moving the predetermined character image may be varied depending on the number of fluctuations from the previous big hit occurrence to the waiting state for the customer, the number of fluctuations after the previous mode transition, and the like.

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present embodiment divides the display area of the display device 41 into a plurality of areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and displays a part of the divided display areas indicating the stop result mode of the variable display game. The possible result mode deriving area is set, and the remaining part or all of the remaining result mode display area suggesting the stop result mode of the variable display game is set as a displayable result mode suggesting area.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the decoration special figure fluctuation display game related to the special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 is usually displayed on the display area of the display device 41 in the left, middle, and right three. This is performed in a normal performance state in which a normal display mode is set in which one variable display region is set, a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed in each variable display region for a predetermined time, and then stopped to display a result mode. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), a divided effect state is set in which a divided display mode is set in which the display area is divided into nine areas of three columns vertically and three columns horizontally. The predetermined condition for entering the split effect state is, for example, that the special figure variation display game has been executed a predetermined number of times in the normal effect state from power-on, or that the mode state transition lottery has been won. In addition, it is good also as conditions on completion | finish of a special game state, or derivation | leading-out of a specific detachment stop mode. Further, the divided effect state is ended, for example, when a specific reach occurs or when a special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the divided effect state.

  The three regions 84, 85, and 86 in the middle stage in the divided effect state constitute three variation display regions on the left, middle, and right, respectively, and are result mode derivation regions that display the stop result mode of the special figure variation display game. Yes. The upper three areas 81, 82, and 83 are a left pattern suggestion area that is a result mode suggestion area that can display a stop result suggestion display mode that suggests a stop result mode of the middle left area 84 that forms the left variation display area. It is an area. Furthermore, the lower three regions 87, 88, 89 are a right pattern suggestion region that is a result mode suggestion region that can display a stop result suggestion display mode that suggests a stop result mode of the middle right region 86 that forms the right variation display region. It is an area.

  By dividing the display area in this way, the stop result mode and the stop result suggestion display mode are displayed in separate areas, and the display time of the stop result suggestion display mode is limited by the display state of the identification information. Effective stop notification can be made. Moreover, it becomes easy to see by displaying the stop result mode which is the matter that the player is most interested in in the middle, and by displaying the stop result suggestion display mode above and below, the stop result suggestion display mode along with the stop result mode Can be displayed, and an effective stop display can be announced.

  As shown in FIG. 134A, the identification information in the normal display mode is a display in which each numeral is integrated with a different character display. Although only a part of the identification information is shown here, nine types of identification information corresponding to numbers 1 to 9 are set similarly. On the other hand, in the divided effect state, the identification information is only numbers as shown in FIG. 133 (b). Then, as the stop result suggestion display mode displayed in the upper and lower stop mode suggestion areas, the character display shown in FIG. 134 (a) corresponding to the number of the identification information to be stopped in the suggestion target area is displayed. Therefore, the identification information to be stopped is suggested. Thus, since the character display included in the identification information stopped and displayed in the result mode derivation area is displayed as the stop result suggestion display mode, the meaning is displayed in the character display that is conventionally used as an auxiliary decoration of the identification information. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In the stop result suggestion display mode, as a display corresponding to the same character display, a normal display shown in FIG. 134 (b) and a special display whose clothes and hairstyle are different from the normal display as shown in FIG. 134 (c). There is. Both the normal display and special display corresponding to the same character display suggest the stop of the same identification information, but depending on whether both the upper and lower stop result suggestion display modes are normal display or special display , To indicate the type of reach and the potential for special results.

  As shown in FIG. 135 (a), when both the upper and lower stop result suggesting display modes are not the normal display or the special display, the stop result suggesting display mode indicates the special result in addition to indicating the identification information to be stopped. It is suggested that the possibility of becoming is not so high. In addition, when both the upper and lower stop result suggestion display modes are normal display, the stop result suggestion display mode suggests that it will be SP reach in addition to suggesting identification information to stop. . Furthermore, if both the top and bottom stop result suggestion display modes are special display, the stop result suggestion display form suggests that there is a high possibility of a special result in addition to suggesting identification information to stop. It has become. For example, when both the upper and lower stop result suggesting display modes are specially displayed as shown in FIG. 135 (b), both the upper and lower stop result suggesting display modes are specially displayed as shown in FIG. 135 (c). This suggests that it is more likely to have a special result than if not.

  FIG. 136 shows the stop order of the variable display of each area. The numbers in the figure indicate the stop order of the variable display. There are a plurality of types of stop orders for the variable display in each area. As shown in FIG. 136 (a), a normal stop pattern for stopping the variable display counterclockwise from the upper right area 83, and FIG. 136 (b). As shown, there is a reverse normal stop pattern in which the variable display is stopped counterclockwise from the lower left region 87. Thereby, it becomes possible to stop the identification information of the suggestion target after displaying the stop result suggestion display mode in the result mode suggestion region.

  In addition, a so-called pseudo-continuation in which a unit variation display that is stopped after a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time in the decorative map display game in the middle of the special map display game is performed two or more times to derive a result mode. The stop order in the case of the variable display mode is as shown in FIGS. 136 (c) and (d). The stop order shown in FIG. 136 (c) is once to stop the variable display counterclockwise from the upper right region 83 and finally stop the variable display in the middle central region 85 as in the normal stop pattern. This is a normal quasi-continuous stop pattern with unit fluctuation display. The stop order shown in FIG. 136 (d) is similar to the reverse normal stop pattern, in which the variable display is stopped counterclockwise from the lower left area 87 and finally the variable display in the middle central area 85 is stopped. Is a reverse normal pseudo-continuous stop pattern in which unit fluctuation display is performed once. As a result, after the stop result suggesting display mode is displayed in the result mode suggesting area, the display of the suggestion target identification information is alternately performed up and down to follow the counterclockwise direction. In these quasi-continuous stop patterns, if the special figure variation display game does not end at the end of one unit variation display, the stopped identification information is displayed in a shaking manner and is not completely stopped (temporary stop) And the next unit variation display is started. Then, after repeating the unit variation display a predetermined number of times, the identification information is completely stopped and the result mode is displayed.

  FIG. 137 shows a display mode with a normal stop pattern as an example of a display mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the divided effect state. When the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the fluctuation display of each of the areas 81 to 89 is started as shown in FIG. At this time, a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed in the three areas 84, 85, 86 in the middle stage, and the stop result suggesting display mode is variably displayed in the six areas in the upper and lower stages. The variable display in each of the areas 81 to 89 is a display mode in which the panel rotates around a rotation axis along the vertical direction set at the center in the left and right direction of each of the areas 81 to 89.

  After the predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), the variable display of the upper three regions 81, 82, 83 forming the left symbol suggestion region ends in the order of the right region 83, the middle region 82, and the left region 81. The stop result suggestion display mode is displayed. The stop result suggestion display mode here is a normal display stop result suggestion display mode that suggests the stop of the identification information “1”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (c), the identification information “1” suggested in the left symbol suggestion area is stopped and displayed in the left area 84 of the middle stage.

  Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137 (d), the three regions 87, 88, 89 in the lower stage forming the right symbol suggestion region are displayed in order of the left region 87, the middle region 88, and the right region 89. Then, the stop result suggestion display mode is displayed. The stop result suggestion display mode here is a normal display stop result suggestion display mode that suggests the stop of the identification information “7”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the identification information “7” suggested in the right symbol suggestion region is stopped and displayed in the middle region 86 on the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (f), the change display of the middle center area 85 is stopped, the stop result mode (here, the stop result mode of the lost state) is displayed, and the special figure change display game is ended.

  FIG. 138 shows another example of the display mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the divided effect state. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the next special figure fluctuation display game is started from the state where the stop result mode of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is displayed, as shown in FIG. 138 (b). One large character is displayed using all nine areas, and the background display is switched to this character display. This character display suggests the presence / absence and type of reach and the high possibility of a special result. The character display shown in FIG. 138 (b) is a reach suggesting background which is a character display suggesting that reach is reached. After this character display is displayed, a variable display is started as shown in FIG. 138 (c). As shown in FIG. 138 (d), the reach state is reached.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (e), a character display corresponding to a stop mode that is a special result (in this case, a character display corresponding to “7”) is displayed in the middle central area 85 that stops last in the reach state. Character display corresponding to the stop mode that causes the loss (character display corresponding to other than “7” in this case) may be alternately displayed in a variable manner. In addition, as shown in FIG. 138 (f), the type of reach (here, XX reach) and the possibility of a special result (indicated here by the number of black stars) are displayed in the central region 85. You may do it.

  FIG. 139 shows the types of background display. There are a plurality of types of background display, and this background display suggests and notifies the state of the probability of a special result. In the low probability clear notification state in which the normal probability state is clearly notified, the normal background A or B is selected. In addition, in the probability state unclear notification state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, any of the special backgrounds A to D is selected. At this time, if the probability state is high, the special background A or B is selected with a high probability, and if it is the normal probability state, the special background C or D is selected with a high probability, and the player guesses the probability state. It can be done. In addition, various background displays such as a background display in a high probability clear notification state that clearly notifies that the probability state is a high probability state are set.

  Further, in the case of the pseudo continuous variation display mode, the special backgrounds C, D, B, and A are displayed in the order every time the unit variation display is started. In this way, as the number of unit variation displays increases, a background display with a high probability of being selected in a high probability state is displayed, and as the number of unit variation displays increases, the possibility of a special result increases. It has come to suggest.

  Note that the timing for displaying the character display as shown in FIG. 138 (b) is not limited to the start of the special figure variation display game, and may be displayed at an arbitrary timing. Further, the background display shown in FIG. 139 may be temporarily displayed at the character display timing shown in FIG. 138 (b) to suggest the probability state. For example, when the special background C is displayed as the background display in the probability state obscured notification state and the special background C is displayed as the background display, the special background A is displayed at the timing of FIG. To suggest.

  In FIG. 140, as an example of the display mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the divided effect state, the display in the pseudo continuous variation display mode that becomes the normal pseudo continuous stop pattern is shown. First, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), when the special figure variation display game is started, the special background C is displayed as one large background display using all nine areas, and the background display is changed. .

  After this background display is made, the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 140 (b), and the upper three regions 81, 82, 83 forming the left symbol suggestion region as shown in FIG. 140 (c) are changed. The display ends in the order of the right region 83, the middle region 82, and the left region 81, and the stop result suggesting display mode is displayed. The stop result suggestion display mode here is a normal display stop result suggestion display mode that suggests the stop of the identification information “1”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (d) or (f), the variable display of the lower three regions 87, 88, 89 forming the right symbol suggestion region ends in the order of the left region 87, the middle region 88, and the right region 89. Then, the stop result suggestion display mode is displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the area 86 on the right side of the middle stage. Here, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), the stop result suggesting display mode suggesting the stop of the identification information “1” is displayed as the stop result suggesting display mode, and is suggested in the right design suggesting region in the middle area 86. When the identification information “1” is stopped and displayed, the reach state is displayed, as shown in FIG. 140 (e). After this, the effect display in the reach state is performed, and the result mode is derived.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), a stop result suggesting display mode that suggests stopping of identification information that is not reachable (here, identification information “3”) is displayed as the stop result suggesting display mode. When the identification information suggested in the right symbol suggestion area is stopped and displayed, the reach state is not reached. In this case, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), the change display of the middle region 85 is stopped, and the identification information of all the regions is temporarily stopped (shaking display). After that, when the identification information of all the areas is completely stopped and the stop result mode is displayed in this state, the stop result mode is set, and the special figure variation display game ends.

  On the other hand, when the next unit variation display is performed in the pseudo continuous variation display mode, the temporary variation state shown in FIG. 140 (g) is changed according to the number of unit variation displays as shown in FIG. 140 (h). The background display is displayed using all nine areas, and the background display is changed. Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the variable display of the upper three areas 81, 82, 83, the middle left area 84, and the central area 85 forming the left symbol suggestion area is resumed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j), the change display of the upper three regions 81, 82, 83 forming the left symbol suggestion region ends in the order of the right region 83, the middle region 82, and the left region 81, and the stop result. After the suggestion display mode is displayed, the identification information suggested in the left symbol suggestion area is stopped and displayed in the left area 84 of the middle stage. Further, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), the variable display of the lower three regions 87, 88, 89 and the middle right region 86 constituting the right symbol suggestion region is resumed. Done. After the unit variation display is performed a predetermined number of times as described above, the result mode is derived and the special figure variation display game is ended.

[Power-on processing]
In order to perform the control as described above, the production control apparatus 300 performs the process shown in FIG. 141 in the power-on process (step B68) in the 1st scene control process shown in FIG. In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B601). If there is no effect request flag (step B601; No), a RAM initialization notification process (step B610) is performed, The power-on process is terminated. If there is an effect request flag (step B601; Yes), a RAM initialization process is set (step B602), and a customer waiting screen process number “0” is set (step B603).

  Next, a customer waiting demo timer (RAM initialization time value; 10000 ms) is set (step B604), initial values are set in the respective storage areas (step B605), and history screen display table information is set (step B606). . Thereafter, a PB operation invalidation flag for invalidating the operation of the effect button 25 (push button; PB) is set (step B607), and the special figure fluctuation display in the normal effect state, which is one of the predetermined conditions for switching to the divided effect state. A mode forced switching count (for example, 60), which is the number of game executions, is set (step B608). Then, the effect request flag is cleared (step B609), and the power-on process is terminated.

[Fluctuation processing]
In addition, the changing process shown in FIG. 142 is performed instead of the changing process shown in FIG. In this changing process, if there is an effect request flag (step B91; Yes), a mode lottery process is performed (step B611). When the update timer is 0 (step B100; Yes), the background switching process (step B612) is performed.

[Mode lottery processing]
FIG. 143 shows the mode lottery process (step B611) in the changing process shown in FIG. In this mode lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the time-short state is in effect (step B621). If the time-short state is in effect (step B621; Yes), the mode lottery process is terminated. If it is not in the time saving state (step B621; No), it is checked whether there is a prefetch mode transition flag (step B622).

  The pre-reading mode transition flag is a flag that is set when a start-up memory that is a target of the pre-reading effect occurs. If there is this prefetching mode transition flag (step B623; Yes), prefetching mode information is set (step B630), and the mode lottery process is terminated. Thereby, the production state is set to the prefetching mode in which the prefetching production is performed. Note that the prefetch mode transition flag is cleared by the end of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is the target of the prefetch effect, and returns to the original effect state.

  If there is no prefetch mode transition flag (step B623; No), it is checked whether there is a split effect execution flag set when the effect state is the split effect state (step B624). When there is this division effect execution flag (step B625; Yes), the mode lottery process is terminated. When there is no division effect execution flag (step B625; No), a random number for mode lottery is acquired (step B626), and it is determined whether or not the mode transition lottery is won based on the acquired random number for mode lottery (step B627). ).

  When the mode transition lottery is not won (step B627; No), the mode lottery process is terminated. When the mode transition lottery is won (step B627; Yes), the division effect execution number (for example, 20), which is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the division effect state, is set (step B628). The execution flag is set (step B629), and the mode lottery process is terminated. Thereby, the division effect state is set with a predetermined probability.

[Variation frequency management process]
In the change count management process (step B94) in the changing process shown in FIG. 142, the process shown in FIG. 144 is performed instead of the process shown in FIG. In this variation count management process, after performing the process from step B110 to B121, it is checked whether there is a division effect execution flag (step B631). When there is no division effect execution flag (step B632; No), it is checked whether the period is forcibly switched (step B633).

  The forcible switchable period is a case where the production state is not the pre-reading mode, for example, the normal production state. If it is not this forcible switching period (step B634; No), the variation number management process is terminated. If it is the period during which forced switching is possible (step B634; Yes), the mode forced switching count is updated by -1 (step B635), and it is determined whether the mode forced switching count is 0 (step B636).

  When the number of times for mode forcible switching is not 0 (step B636; No), the variation number management process is terminated. When the number of times for mode forced switching is 0 (step B636; Yes), the division effect execution count that is the execution count of the special figure variation display game to be in the split effect state is set (step B637). The flag is set (step B638), and the variation number management process is terminated. As a result, when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the normal performance state, the game is forcibly switched to the split performance state.

  On the other hand, if there is a division effect execution flag (step B632; Yes), the division effect execution count is updated by -1 (step B639), and it is determined whether the division effect execution count is 0 (step B640). And when division | segmentation effect execution frequency is not 0 (step B640; No), a frequency | count management process is complete | finished. If the divided effect execution count is 0 (step B640; Yes), the divided effect execution flag is cleared (step B641). Then, the division effect end flag is set (step B642), the mode forced switching count (for example, 60) is set (step B643), and the variation count management process ends. Thereby, when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the divided effect state, the normal effect state is restored, and by executing the predetermined number of special figure change display game in the normal effect state, the divided effect state is entered again.

[Variation pattern information setting process]
In the changing pattern information setting process (step B95) in the changing process shown in FIG. 142, the process shown in FIG. 145 is performed instead of the process shown in FIG. In this variation pattern information setting process, after performing the process from step B131 to B141, the division effect information setting process (step B651) is performed. In the process of determining the corresponding special variation pattern as the variation pattern (step B140) and the process of determining the variation pattern corresponding to the command based on the game state and the effect information (step B141), the effect state (the normal effect state or The variation pattern is set in consideration of the division effect state.

[Division effect information setting process]
FIG. 146 shows the divided effect information setting process (step B651) in the variation pattern information setting process shown in FIG. In this divided effect information setting process, first, it is determined whether there is a divided effect execution flag (step B661), and if there is no divided effect execution flag (step B661; No), it is checked whether there is a pre-read mode target information setting. (Step B675). If there is a split effect execution flag (step B661; Yes), it is determined whether or not the pseudo continuous variation display mode is set (step B663).

  In the case of the pseudo continuous variation mode (step B663; Yes), the background information is set to a special background (step B667), the pseudo continuous flag is set (step B668), and the division effect execution count is acquired (step B669). ). Thereby, the background display as shown in FIG. 140 is performed and the background display is changed. Further, when it is not the pseudo continuous variation mode (step B663; No), it is determined whether or not reach occurs (step B664). And when reach does not generate | occur | produce (step B664; No), a division | segmentation effect information setting process is complete | finished. If the reach occurs (step B666; Yes), the background information is set as the reach suggestion background (step B665), the reach suggestion background flag is set (step B666), and the division effect execution count is acquired (step B666). Step B669). Thereby, the character display as shown in FIG. 138 is performed, and the background display is changed.

  Thereafter, based on the obtained number of times of division effect execution, it is determined whether or not it is the first rotation (first special figure variation display game) after entering the division effect state (step B670). And when it is the 1st rotation after becoming a division | segmentation effect state (step B670; Yes), a division | segmentation effect information setting process is complete | finished. That is, in this case, the process related to the end of the divided effect state is not performed. If it is not the first rotation after entering the split effect state (step B670; No), it is determined whether a specific reach occurs (step B671).

  The specific reach is a reach that is a condition for ending the split effect state, and is SP reach here. If this specific reach does not occur (step B671; No), the divided effect information setting process is terminated. If a specific reach occurs (step B671; Yes), the division effect execution flag is cleared (step B672), and the division effect end flag is set (step B673). Then, the number of times for forced mode switching (for example, 60) is set (step B674), and it is checked whether there is a prefetch mode target information setting (step B675). As a result, the split effect state ends due to the occurrence of the specific reach in the split effect state, and the normal effect state is obtained. In addition, after the split effect state ends, the special effect change display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the normal effect state, thereby switching to the split effect state again.

  The prefetching mode target information is information set in the start memory that triggered the execution of the prefetching effect. If there is no prefetch mode target information setting (step B676; No), the divided effect information setting process is terminated. If there is pre-reading mode target information setting (step B676; Yes), the pre-reading mode end flag is set (step B677), the number of mode forced switching (for example, 60) is set (step B678), and the divided effect is produced. The information setting process ends. As a result, after the pre-reading mode ends, the special effect variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the normal effect state, thereby switching to the split effect state.

[Division effect information setting process]
FIG. 147 shows the background switching process (step B612) in the changing process shown in FIG. In this background switching process, it is first determined whether the scene is the final scene (step B681). If the scene is not the final scene (step B681; No), the reach suggestion set when the variation pattern is in the reach state. It is checked whether there is a background flag (step B693).

  If there is no reach suggestion background flag (step B693; No), it is determined whether or not there is a pseudo continuous flag that is set when the variation pattern has a pseudo continuous variation display mode (step B697). If there is a reach suggestion background flag (step B694; Yes), it is determined whether it is a reach suggestion background display timing (step B695). The reach suggestion background display timing is a timing at which one large reach suggestion background is displayed using all nine regions as shown in FIG. 138 (b). If it is the reach suggestion background display timing (step B695; Yes), the background information is set as the reach suggestion background (step B696), and it is determined whether there is a pseudo-continuous flag (step B697). If the reach suggestion background display timing is not reached (step B695; No), it is determined whether there is a pseudo-continuous flag (step B697).

  If there is no pseudo continuous flag (step B697; No), it is checked whether there is a prefetching mode end flag (step B702). If there is a pseudo-continuous flag (step B697; Yes), it is determined whether it is the background display timing (step B698). The background display timing is a timing at which one large special background is displayed using all nine regions as shown in FIGS. 140 (a) and 140 (h). If it is this background display timing (step B698; Yes), the background information is set to the corresponding special background (step B699), and it is checked whether there is a prefetch mode end flag (step B702). If it is not the background display timing (step B698; No), it is checked whether there is a prefetch mode end flag (step B702).

  On the other hand, if it is the final scene (step B681; Yes), the end of the variable display game is set (step B682), and it is checked whether there is a division effect end flag (step B683). If there is a split effect end flag (step B684; Yes), the split effect end flag is cleared (step B700), the background information is set to normal (normal effect state) (step B701), and the prefetch mode end flag is set. It is checked whether it exists (step B702). Thereby, the background in the divided effect state is switched to the background in the normal effect state.

  If there is no division effect end flag (step B684; No), it is checked whether there is a reach suggestion background flag (step B685). If there is a reach suggestion background flag (step B686; Yes), the reach suggestion background flag is cleared (step B687), the background information is set to the original background information (step B688), and the pseudo-continuation flag is set. It is checked whether it exists (step B689). In the process of setting background information to the original background information (step B688), background information before the occurrence of reach is set. If there is no reach suggestion background flag (step B686; No), it is checked whether there is a pseudo continuous flag (step B689).

  If there is a pseudo-continuous flag (step B690; Yes), the pseudo-continuous flag is cleared (step B691), the background information is set to the original background information (step B692), and it is checked whether there is a prefetching mode end flag. (Step B702). If there is no pseudo continuous flag (step B690; No), it is checked whether there is a prefetching mode end flag (step B702). In the process of setting the background information to the original background information (step B692), the background information before the occurrence of the pseudo-variable display mode is set.

  The prefetching mode end flag is set in the special figure fluctuation display game executed last in the prefetching mode. This special figure fluctuation display game is a special figure fluctuation based on the start memory that triggered the occurrence of the prefetching effect. It is a display game. If there is no prefetch mode flag (step B703; No), the background switching process is terminated. If there is a prefetch mode end flag (step B703; Yes), it is determined whether it is the background switching timing (step B704). The background switching timing is a timing for ending the prefetching mode. When this timing is reached (step B704; Yes), the background information is set to the normal background (step B705), and the prefetching mode end flag is cleared (step B705). Step B706), the background switching process is terminated. If it is not the background switching timing (step B704; No), the background switching process is terminated.

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37), the variation having a display area capable of displaying a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner A gaming machine that includes a display device (display device 41) and that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, and is a display control of the variable display game Display control means (production control device 300), and the display control means can divide the display area into a plurality of areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a part of the divided display areas. Is a result mode derivation area (regions 84, 85, 86) that can display the stop result mode of the variable display game, and the remaining part or all of the remaining display results suggesting the stop result mode of the variable display game The fact that as a display possible outcomes manner suggested region like (area 81,82,83,87,88,89).

  The plurality of pieces of identification information are displays including different character displays, and the display control means (production control device 300) displays the character included in the identification information stopped and displayed in the result mode derivation area as the stop result suggesting display mode. By displaying the display in the stop result suggestion area, the stop result mode of the variable display game is suggested.

  Further, the display control means (production control device 300) divides the display area into nine areas of three columns up and down and three columns on the left and right based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and among the display areas divided into nine In addition, while it is possible to display the stop result mode of the variable display game using the middle three regions 84, 85, 86 as the result mode deriving region, the upper three regions 81, 82, 83 and the lower three regions 87, 88 are displayed. , 89 as a result mode suggestion region, the stop result suggestion display mode that suggests the stop result mode of the variable display game can be displayed.

  The stop result suggesting display mode is displayed in all of the upper regions 81, 82, 83 and the lower regions 87, 88, 89, but may be displayed using a part of the regions. In addition, although it has been divided into nine regions of three columns vertically and three columns horizontally, other division methods may be used. Further, the background display may be a stop result suggesting display mode that suggests a stop result mode of the middle central region 85 that forms the middle fluctuation display region. Further, a stop result suggesting display mode may be displayed based on the player's operation of the effect button 25. In this way, the player who does not want to know the suggestion of the stop result can be prevented from displaying the stop result suggesting display mode.

[First Modification of Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described eighth embodiment, hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification performs various suggestive effects using all nine areas at the start of the special figure variation display game.

  FIG. 148 shows an example of the display mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the gaming machine of this modification. As shown in FIG. 148 (a), when the next special figure fluctuation display game is started from the state where the stop result mode of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is displayed, from FIG. 148 (b) to (e). As shown in FIG. 4, the suggestion effect is performed using all nine regions.

  First, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the entire region is covered with a panel. When the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 148 (f) from this state, it is suggested that the possibility of the special result is the lowest. In addition, from the state shown in FIG. 148 (b), if the region excluding the central region 85 is stopped in the reach state as shown in FIG. 148 (g) without the change display shown in FIG. 148 (f). It is suggested that there is a high possibility of a special result rather than going through the state of FIG. 148 (f).

  Also, from the state shown in FIG. 148 (b), as shown in FIG. 148 (c), the panel of the three regions 84, 85, 86 in the middle stage is opened so that a part of the character display can be seen. When the variable display is started as shown in 148 (f), it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of a special result than when the variable display is started from the state of FIG. 148 (b). Further, from the state shown in FIG. 148 (c), if the region excluding the central region 85 is stopped in the reach state as shown in FIG. 148 (g) without the change display shown in FIG. 148 (f). It is suggested that there is a high possibility of a special result rather than going through the state of FIG. 148 (f).

  Furthermore, from the state shown in FIG. 148 (c), all the panels are opened as shown in FIG. 148 (d) so that the entire character display can be seen. From this state, the variable display is shown as shown in FIG. 148 (f). When is started, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility that a special result is obtained than when the variable display is started from the state of FIG. 148 (c). Further, from the state shown in FIG. 148 (d), if the region excluding the central region 85 is stopped in the reach state as shown in FIG. 148 (g) without the change display shown in FIG. 148 (f). It is suggested that there is a high possibility of a special result rather than going through the state of FIG. 148 (f).

  Then, from the state shown in FIG. 148 (d), a movie effect in which the character operates as shown in FIG. 148 (e) is obtained, and when the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 148 (f) from this state, It is suggested that the most special result is likely. Further, from the state shown in FIG. 148 (e), if the region excluding the central region 85 is stopped in the reach state as shown in FIG. 148 (g) without the change display shown in FIG. 148 (f). It is suggested that there is a high possibility of a special result rather than going through the state of FIG. 148 (f). Note that the characters displayed in FIGS. 148 (d) to (e) are displayed in the upper three areas 81, 82, 83 and the lower three areas 87, 88, 89 as shown in FIG. 148 (g). It is the same as the character of the stop result suggestion display mode to be displayed, and suggests the stop result suggestion display mode.

  In this way, the entertainment of the game can be improved by performing the effect of suggesting the result of the special figure variation display game using the display area divided into nine areas of the upper and lower three columns and the left and right three columns. Note that not only the high possibility of a special result but also a fluctuation pattern may be suggested. For example, when the variable display is started from the state of FIG. 148 (b), it is suggested that there is no reach or normal reach, and when the variable display is started from the state of FIG. 148 (c), the normal reach is obtained. It suggests that when the variable display is started from the state of FIG. 148 (d), it is SP reach, and when the variable display is started from the state of FIG. 148 (e), it is SP2 reach or SP3 reach. It may be suggested that

  FIG. 149 shows another example of the suggestion effect performed using all nine areas at the start of the special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 149 (a), display is made to prompt the player to operate the effect button 25 in a state where all the regions are covered with the panel. When the player presses the effect button 25, the panel is opened counterclockwise from the upper right region 83 every time the player presses the effect button 25, and the state shown in FIG. 149 (b) is obtained.

  Then, when the player presses the effect button 25 from the state shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the panel of the central area 85 is opened, a special result is obtained if the character display is completed as shown in FIG. 149 (c). This suggests that there is a high possibility that Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 149 (d), if the movable effect member 731 appears on the front surface of the display device 41, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of a special result. In addition, when the player presses the effect button 25 from the state shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the panel in the central area 85 is opened, a special character display is not completed as shown in FIG. 149 (e). This suggests that the result is unlikely. For example, as shown in FIG. 149 (f), the special figure fluctuation display game is ended without the reach state. Thus, the entertainment of a game can be improved by making it an effect that a player can participate in.

  When the player does not press the effect button 25 from the state shown in FIG. 149 (a), or when the player does not press the effect button 25 from the state shown in FIG. 149 (b), the panel is automatically opened. 149 (c) and (e) may be displayed, or the variable display may be started after a predetermined time without opening the panel.

[Second Modification of Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described eighth embodiment, hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification is adapted to make various suggestions depending on the stop pattern of the change display.

  There are five types of stop patterns, stop patterns 1 to 5, and when each stop pattern is selected, the stop pattern is selected so that the result and the variation pattern have a ratio as shown in FIG. Each stop pattern is a pattern as shown in FIGS. 150 (b) to 150 (f), and after stopping the change display of the upper and lower result mode suggestion display areas, the middle left area 84 and the middle right area 86. The variation display is stopped, and finally, the variation display in the middle region 85 is stopped, and the special figure variation display game is ended. In addition to the stop patterns shown in FIGS. 150 (b) to 150 (f), a plurality of stop patterns such as the stop pattern shown in FIG. 150 (g), for example, are set, and the types of reach and special results May be suggested in more detail.

  For example, in the stop pattern 1, the upper right region 83, the central region 82, and the left region 81 are first stopped in this order, and then the lower left region 87, the central region 88, and the right region 89 are stopped in this order. In the stop pattern 5, first, the lower left area 87, the central area 88, and the right area 89 are stopped in this order, and then the upper right area 83, the central area 82, and the left area 81 are stopped in this order. Then, the stop result suggestion display mode displayed in each area again in the same order is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 151, in the stop pattern 3, first, the upper left area 81 and the lower left area 87 are stopped as shown in FIG. 151 (a), and then as shown in FIG. 151 (b). The upper middle region 82 and the lower middle region 88 are stopped, and finally the upper right region 83 and the lower right region 89 are stopped as shown in FIG. 151 (c).

  In order to perform such control, the effect control device 300 determines the corresponding special variation pattern as the variation pattern in the variation pattern information setting processing shown in FIG. 145 (step B140), the gaming state and the effect information. In the process of determining the variation pattern corresponding to the command based on (step B141), the stop pattern is set based on the result and the variation pattern.

  In this way, by suggesting by the stop pattern, in addition to notifying the stop result by the stop result suggesting display mode, the possibility of becoming a special result mode by the stop order of the variable display of each region is suggested. Can make a more interesting notice.

  From the above, the display control means (production control device 300) performs the variable display of the identification information or the stop result suggestion display mode in each of the nine display areas, and sequentially stops the variable display after a predetermined time. Thus, it is configured to display the stop result mode or the stop result suggestion display mode, and suggests a high possibility of becoming a special result mode according to the stop order of the variable display of the display area divided into nine. It becomes that.

[Third Modification of Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described eighth embodiment, hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification performs an effect linked with the operation of the movable effect members 761 and 771.

  152 and 153 show an example of the decorative special figure variation display game in the gaming machine of this modification. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), when a stop result suggesting display mode of the normal display suggesting the identification information “5” is displayed and the reach state is reached, a movable effect is obtained as shown in FIG. 152 (b). The members 761 and 771 appear so as to cover the display device 41. Thereafter, when the movable effect members 761 and 771 are retracted as shown in FIG. 152 (c), the stop result suggesting display mode is changed to a special display. In other words, the display is changed to a display that is more likely to have a special result.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), when the reach state is reached with the identification information “8” that is the 15R normal symbol, the movable effect members 761, 771 are displayed on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 153 (b). Appears to cover. Thereafter, when the movable effect members 761 and 771 are retracted as shown in FIG. 153 (c), the identification information changes to “5” which is a 15R probability variation pattern, and the stop result suggesting display mode also suggests the identification information “5”. It changes to a special display. That is, the state changes to a more advantageous state for the player. In this way, by combining with the operations of the movable effect members 761 and 771, a more interesting effect can be performed.

[Fourth Modification of Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modified example of the eighth embodiment is described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described eighth embodiment, hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is in a split effect state after the end of a specific big hit or small hit.

[Ending process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the ending process shown in FIG. 154 is performed instead of the ending process shown in FIG. In this ending process, in the latent mode (step B157; Yes), the division effect execution count (for example, 20) is set (step B711), the division effect execution flag is set (step B712), and the division effect mode is set. A setting process (step B713) is performed.

[Ending process for small hits]
Further, instead of the small hitting ending process shown in FIG. 74, the small hitting ending process shown in FIG. 155 is performed. In this small hitting ending process, when there is no specific effect flag (step B173; No), the division effect execution count (for example, 20) is set (step B721), and the division effect execution flag is set (step B722). Then, a division effect mode setting process (step B723) is performed.

[Division effect mode setting process]
FIG. 156 shows the divided effect mode setting process in the ending process and the small hitting ending process. In this divided effect mode setting process, first, symbol information is acquired (step B731), and it is determined whether it is a small hit (step B732). If it is a small hit (step B732; Yes), a background setting determination value after the small hit is set (step B733), and a background setting random value is acquired (step B735). On the other hand, if it is not a small hit (step B732; No), a background setting determination value after 2R is set (step B734), and a background setting random value is acquired (step B735). Then, the background information corresponding to the set determination value is set with reference to the acquired background setting random value (step B736), and the divided effect mode setting process is terminated. The background setting determination value after the small hit and the background setting determination value after the 2R are different from each other, and the background setting determination value after the 2R suggests a higher probability state than the background setting determination value after the small hit. The probability of selecting a background display is high.

  With the above processing, the split effect state is set when the 2R big hit or the small hit occurs and the latent mode in which the probability state is not clearly notified is set. Further, any one of the special backgrounds A to D shown in FIG. 139 is selected according to the probability state, and the probability state is suggested. Thereby, the interest of the game after 2R big hit and small hits with few prize balls which can be acquired can be heightened. In addition, you may make it suggest a probability state with the stop pattern in a division | segmentation effect state. Moreover, you may make it be set as a division | segmentation effect state after completion | finish of a special game state irrespective of the kind of special result.

[Fifth Modification of Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth modification of the eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described eighth embodiment, hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification can display a prefetch notification that is a notification of the result of the prefetch process in the result mode suggestion area.

  FIG. 157 shows an example of prefetch notification. When the special figure variation display game is finished as shown in FIG. 157 (a) and the last special figure fluctuation display game in the split effect state is started as shown in FIG. 157 (b), it is started by the player. A display prompting to increase the memory is displayed. When an overflow winning in which a game ball wins at the start winning opening 36 occurs in the state where the first start memory is the upper limit number, a condition for performing a pre-read notification is established. Here, as shown in FIG. 157 (c), there are four first start memories, and the second start memories are zero.

  When the conditions for performing the pre-read notification are satisfied, the pre-read results of the start memories are displayed in the upper regions 81, 82, and 83 in the state where the change display of the middle region 85 is performed as shown in FIG. 157 (c). Notifications are made sequentially. In this notification, first, the start memory to be notified is displayed as shown in FIG. 157 (d), and the variable display of the upper regions 81, 82, 83 is performed as shown in FIG. 157 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (f), the change display of the upper regions 81, 82, and 83 is stopped, and the prefetch result is notified. Thereafter, the pre-read notification for the next start memory is performed in the same manner as in FIGS. 157 (d) to (f), and after the pre-read notification for all the start memories is completed, the special figure variation display game ends. ing.

  In the prefetch notification shown in FIG. 157 (f), “ska” is displayed in each of the upper regions 81, 82, and 83, and it is unlikely that a special result is likely to be obtained in the special map variation display game based on the start memory. Informed. In addition to this, for example, if there is one or two “reach” indications, it indicates that there is a high possibility of reaching a reach state, and if all reach “reach” indications, a reach state is indicated. Is definitely notified. Further, if all are “winning”, it is definitely notified that a special result is obtained. Thereby, in addition to the notification of the stop result in the stop result suggestion display mode, the pre-read notification can be performed, and a more interesting notice can be performed.

[Read-ahead command reception processing]
In order to perform such control, the process shown in FIG. 158 is performed in the prefetch command reception process (step B78) in the first scene control process shown in FIG. In this prefetch command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch command (start opening prize presentation command, prize presentation symbol command) has been received (step B741). If not received (step B741; No), the prefetch command is received. The reception process ends. If it has been received (step B741; Yes), the prefetch information is saved in the corresponding reserved storage area (step B742), and it is checked whether the hold is a specific hold that is SP reach (step B743).

  If the hold is not a specific hold that becomes SP reach (step B744; No), the prefetch command receiving process is terminated. Further, when the hold is a specific hold that becomes SP reach (step B744; Yes), a random number for mode transition lottery is acquired (step B745), and it is determined whether the mode is shifted based on the acquired random number (step B746). ).

  If the mode is not changed (step B746; No), the prefetch command reception process is terminated. If the mode is to be changed (step B746; Yes), the prefetch mode change flag is set (step B747). Then, pre-read mode information is set in the hold storage area for holding the special figure variation display game before the hold (specific hold) (step B745), and the pre-read mode target information is set in the hold storage area for the hold (specific hold). Is set (step B746), and the prefetch command receiving process is terminated.

  With this process, the prefetching results for each start memory are stored in the effect control device 300. Further, when a specific hold that becomes SP reach occurs, the pre-reading mode is shifted with a predetermined probability.

[Variation pattern information setting process]
In addition, the process shown in FIG. 159 is performed instead of the variation pattern information setting process shown in FIG. In this variation pattern information setting process, if there is no special effect variation flag (step B137; No) or not a special effect target (step B139; No), is there a divided effect execution flag set in the divided effect state? Is determined (step B751). When there is no division effect execution flag (step B751; No), a variation pattern corresponding to the command is determined based on the gaming state and the effect information (step B141). If there is a division effect execution flag (step B751; Yes), it is determined whether the number of division effect executions is 1 (step B752).

  If the divided effect execution count is not 1 (step B752; No), that is, if it is not the last special figure variation display game in the divided effect state, the variation pattern corresponding to the command is determined based on the game state and the effect information (step B141). ). If the division effect execution count is 1 (step B752; Yes), that is, if it is the last special figure fluctuation display game in the division effect state, the corresponding division prefetch fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern (step B753). ). Thereby, the variation pattern of the last special figure variation display game in the divided effect state becomes a variation pattern as shown in FIG. 157, and the prefetching notification can be executed.

  It should be noted that the number of times of execution of the divided effect state is also managed by the game control device 100, and a variation time during which the prefetch notification can be performed is set for the last special figure variation display game in the divided effect state. good. In this case, the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 160 is used instead of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 53, and the last special figure variation display game in the divided effect state is shown in the table shown in FIG. 160 (d). Based on this, a variation pattern having a variation time of 15 seconds is set. This makes it possible to reliably perform prefetch notification. Further, by managing the number of executions of the divided effect state also in the game control device 100, a table used during the divided effect state can be set separately as shown in FIG. 160 (e).

  Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37), the right to execute the variable display game is stored as a start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the start A starting storage means (game control device 100) for extracting and storing a random number for determining whether or not a special result mode is obtained for each storage, and a random number stored as a starting storage in the starting storage means. Pre-determining means (game control device 100) for determining before the variable display game based on the game is executed, the display control means (production control device 300) of the pre-determining means in the result mode suggestion region It is possible to display a prefetch notification that is a notification based on the determination result.

  161 and 162 show another example of the prefetch notification. In this example, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the start memory stored first in the first start memory in the upper region 81, 82, 83 in the divided effect state, the start memory stored second, A prefetch notification of the start memory that is digested third is performed. In addition, in the lower areas 87, 88, 89, the start memory that is digested first among the second start memories, the start memory that is digested second, the pre-read notification of the start memory that is digested third are performed. It has become.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), when there are four first start memories and three second start memories, the start memory that is first digested in the upper right region 83 with respect to the first start memories. Pre-read notification for the character's foot portion is displayed, and pre-read notification for the start memory that is secondly digested in the upper center region 82 is displayed for the character's torso portion. A pre-read notification about the start memory which is digested third in 81 is performed by displaying the head portion of the character. As for the second start memory, a pre-read notification about the start memory which is digested first in the lower left area 87 is performed by displaying the head part of the character, and is second digested in the lower area 88. The pre-read notification for the start memory is performed by displaying the character's torso portion, and the pre-read notification for the start memory that is digested third in the lower right area 89 is performed by displaying the character's foot portion. In addition, as shown in FIG. 161 (c), when there are two first start memories and one second start memory, the pre-read notification is made in the upper right area 83 and the center area 82 for the first start memories. And the pre-read notification is performed in the lower left area 87 for the second startup memory.

  In this look-ahead notification, the possibility of a special result is reported depending on the display mode of each part of the character's head, torso, and feet. If the possibility of a special result is low, FIG. Each part of the character display of the normal display shown in b) is displayed, and when there is a high possibility of a special result, each part of the character display of the special display shown in FIG. 134 (c) is displayed. FIG. 162 shows an example of prefetch notification in the process of sequentially digesting from the state where there are three first start memories.

  If there is a low possibility of a special result for any of the start memories in the state where there are three first start memories, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. When one first start memory is digested and two first start memories are obtained, the digest order of each start memory is incremented by one. Thus, for example, the start memory that is digested third, which was informed in FIG. 162 (a) that the possibility of a special result is low due to the head of the character of normal display, is digested second. Since this is stored, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the pre-read notification for the start-up storage is performed by displaying the character's trunk in the normal display. After that, when one first start memory is further digested and the first start memory becomes one, it is informed in FIG. 162 (b) that the possibility of a special result is low due to the torso of the normally displayed character. Since the start memory to be digested second becomes the start memory to be digested first, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the pre-read notification for the start memory is performed by displaying the leg of the character that is normally displayed. Is called.

  Further, when it is notified that there is a high possibility of a special result for the start memory that is digested third in the state where there are three first start memories, as shown in FIG. 162 (d). The display in the upper left area 81 corresponding to the start-up memory is the special display character display. Then, when one first start memory is consumed and there are two first start memories, the start order of each start memory is incremented by one, and as shown in FIG. This is done by displaying the body of a specially displayed character. Thereafter, when one first start memory is further digested and the first start memory becomes one, as shown in FIG. 162 (f), the pre-read notification for the start memory is performed by displaying the feet of the special display character. .

  In the upper areas 81, 82, and 83 and the lower areas 87, 88, and 89, the display of the stop result suggesting display mode and the display of the prefetch notification may be switched according to the progress of the special figure variation display game. good. For example, a pre-read notification may be performed for a predetermined period from the start of the special figure variation display game, and the stop result suggesting display mode may be displayed. Further, in an area where there is no start memory to be prefetched, a display suggesting the result of the special figure variation display game being executed may be performed. In addition, the pre-read notification for the second start-up memory may be performed only in the time-short state. In addition, the configuration of the present embodiment can be applied in combination with the configuration of the other embodiments.

  The gaming machine 10 as described above is a display capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). A game machine that includes a variable display device (display device 41) having a region and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode. Display control means (production control device 300) that performs display control of the game, and the display control means can divide the display area into a plurality of areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the display area of the divided display areas Of these, a result mode deriving region (area 84, 85, 86) that can display the stop result mode of the variable display game is partly displayed, and the remaining part or all of the stop result suggests the stop result mode of the variable display game. Capable of displaying a suggested display mode results embodiments suggestion regions so that the (region 81,82,83,87,88,89).

  Accordingly, by dividing the display area, the stop result mode and the stop result suggesting display mode are displayed in separate areas, and the display time of the stop result suggesting display mode is limited by the display state of the identification information. Without any notice, an effective stop display can be announced.

  The plurality of pieces of identification information are displays including different character displays, and the display control means (production control device 300) displays the character included in the identification information stopped and displayed in the result mode derivation area as the stop result suggesting display mode. By displaying the display in the stop result suggestion area, the stop result mode of the variable display game is suggested.

  Therefore, since the character display included in the identification information stopped and displayed in the result mode deriving area is displayed as the stop result suggesting display mode, the meaning is given to the character display that was conventionally used as an auxiliary decoration of the identification information. It can be held and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the display control means (production control device 300) divides the display area into nine areas of three columns up and down and three columns on the left and right based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and among the display areas divided into nine In addition, while it is possible to display the stop result mode of the variable display game using the middle three regions 84, 85, 86 as the result mode deriving region, the upper three regions 81, 82, 83 and the lower three regions 87, 88 are displayed. , 89 as a result mode suggestion region, a stop result suggesting display mode that suggests a stop result mode of the variable display game is made displayable.

  Therefore, it becomes easy to see by displaying the stop result mode, which is the matter that the player is most interested in, in the middle, and by displaying the stop result suggestion display mode above and below, the stop result suggestion display mode along with the stop result mode Can be displayed, and an effective stop display can be announced.

  In addition, the display control means (production control device 300) performs the variable display of the identification information or the stop result suggestion display mode in each of the display areas divided into nine, and sequentially stops the variable display after a predetermined time, It is configured to display a stop result mode or a stop result suggestion display mode, and suggests a high possibility of becoming a special result mode according to the stop order of the variable display of the display area divided into nine. .

  Therefore, in addition to notifying the stop result by the stop result suggesting display mode, it is possible to suggest a high possibility of becoming a special result mode by the stop order of the variable display of each region, and a more interesting notice is given. be able to.

  Further, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37), the right to execute the variable display game is stored as a starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit, and for each starting memory. Starting memory means (game control device 100) for extracting and storing a random number for determining whether or not to be a special result mode, and a random number stored as a starting memory in the starting memory means, based on the starting memory Pre-determining means (game control device 100) for determining before the display game is executed, and the display control means (production control device 300) is displayed in the result mode suggestion area in the determination result of the pre-determining means. It is possible to display a prefetch notification that is a notification based on the information.

  Therefore, pre-notification can be performed in addition to the notification of the stop result in the stop result suggestion display mode, and a more interesting notice can be performed.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 36 start prize opening (start prize area)
37 Ordinary variable prize device (start prize area)
41 Display device (variable display device)
81-89 Display area (result mode derivation area, result mode suggestion area)
100 Game control device (start-up storage means, prior determination means)
300 Production control device (display control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine comprising a display device having a display unit capable of displaying an effect display, and a movable effect unit having a movable effect member,
The movable effect unit includes at least a first movable effect unit including a first movable effect member and a second movable effect unit including a second movable effect member,
The first movable effect member includes a first position forward of the display unit via a first drive mechanism by a first drive source, and a second position on the edge side of the display unit with respect to the first position. Can be moved between,
The second movable effect member includes a third position in front of the display unit via a second drive mechanism by a second drive source, and a fourth position on the edge side of the display unit with respect to the third position. Can be moved between,
The predetermined part of the first movable effect member is visible to the player at the first position, and the predetermined part of the first movable effect member and the part of the second drive mechanism are: When the first movable effect member is located at the first position, it does not overlap in the front-rear direction, and when the first movable effect member is located at the second position, it is arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. And
The first movable effect member and the second movable effect member are arranged substantially side by side on a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction ,
The gaming machine, wherein the first position and the third position overlap at least partially .

Images